KX-NS700 v4.4000 Installation Manual

KX-NS700 v4.4000 Installation Manual
Installation Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Model No.
KX-NS700
KX-NS700 manuals are specific to the KX-NS700 only. Please refer to the KX-NS700G Quick Reference Guide
if you are using the KX-NS700G model. Some specifications/functions described in this manual may be different.
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1 For Your Safety (Page 16)" before using this product.
KX-NS700: PFMPR Software File Version 004.40000 or later
Document Version 2016-03
System Components
System Components
System Components for KX-NS700
Category
2
Model No.
Description
Main Unit
KX-NS700
Main Unit
Activation Key Codes*1
KX-NSE101
Activation Key for Mobile Extension for 1 User (1
Mobile User)
KX-NSE105
Activation Key for Mobile Extension for 5 Users (5
Mobile Users)
KX-NSE110
Activation Key for Mobile Extension for 10 Users (10
Mobile Users)
KX-NSE120
Activation Key for Mobile Extension for 20 Users (20
Mobile Users)
KX-NSE201
Activate 1 IP-CS for expansion to 8ch Distributed type
of Activation key (1 IP-CS channel expansion)
KX-NSE205
Activate 5 IP-CS for expansion to 8ch Distributed type
of Activation key (5 IP-CS channel expansion)
KX-NSE210
Activate 10 IP-CS for expansion to 8ch Distributed type
of Activation key (10 IP-CS channel expansion)
KX-NSE220
Activate 20 IP-CS for expansion to 8ch Distributed type
of Activation key (20 IP-CS channel expansion)
KX-NSM102
2-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (2 IP Trunk)
KX-NSM104
4-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (4 IP Trunk)
KX-NSM108
8-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (8 IP Trunk)
KX-NSM116
16-Channel IP Trunk Activation Key (16 IP Trunk)
KX-NSM201
1-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone/
P-SIP Extension Activation Key (1 IPSoftphone/IP PT/
SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
KX-NSM205
5-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone/
P-SIP Extension Activation Key (5 IPSoftphone/IP PT/
SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
KX-NSM210
10-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone/
P-SIP Extension Activation Key (10 IPSoftphone/IP
PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
KX-NSM220
20-Channel IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone/
P-SIP Extension Activation Key (20 IPSoftphone/IP
PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
KX-NSM501
1-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension
Activation Key (1 IP PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
KX-NSM505
5-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension
Activation Key (5 IP PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
System Components
Category
Document Version 2016-03
Model No.
Description
KX-NSM510
10-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension
Activation Key (10 IP PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
KX-NSM520
20-Channel IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension
Activation Key (20 IP PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP)
KX-NSM701
1-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (1 SIP
Extension)
KX-NSM705
5-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (5 SIP
Extension)
KX-NSM710
10-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (10 SIP
Extension)
KX-NSM720
20-Channel SIP Extension Activation Key (20 SIP
Extension)
KX-NSN001
Activation Key for One-look Network (One-look
Network)
KX-NSN002
Activation Key for QSIG Network (QSIG Network)
KX-NSP101
Advanced Activation Key Package (E-mail/Two-way
Recording/Mobile/CA Pro) for 1 User (Adv. Pkg 1 User)
KX-NSP105
Advanced Activation Key Package (E-mail/Two-way
Recording/Mobile/CA Pro) for 5 Users (Adv. Pkg 5
Users)
KX-NSP110
Advanced Activation Key Package (E-mail/Two-way
Recording/Mobile/CA Pro) for 10 Users (Adv. Pkg 10
Users)
KX-NSP120
Advanced Activation Key Package (E-mail/Two-way
Recording/Mobile/CA Pro) for 20 Users (Adv. Pkg 20
Users)
KX-NSU002
Activation Key for Two-way Recording Control
(Two-way REC Control)
KX-NSU003
Activation Key for Message Backup (Message
Backup)
KX-NSU102
2-Channel Unified Messaging Activation Key (2 UM
Port)
KX-NSU104
4-Channel Unified Messaging Activation Key (4 UM
Port)
KX-NSU301
Activation Key for Two-way Recording for 1 User (2way
REC 1 User)
KX-NSU305
Activation Key for Two-way Recording for 5 Users
(2way REC 5 Users)
KX-NSU310
Activation Key for Two-way Recording for 10 Users
(2way REC 10 Users)
KX-NSU320
Activation Key for Two-way Recording for 20 Users
(2way REC 20 Users)
Installation Manual
3
System Components
Category
4
Installation Manual
Model No.
Description
KX-NSU399
Activation Key for Two-way Recording for All Users
(2way REC All Users)
KX-NSA010
Activation Key for CA Thin Client Server Connection
(CA Thin Client)
KX-NSA020
Activation Key for Multiple CSTA Connection (CSTA
Multiplexer)
KX-NSA201
Activation Key for CA PRO for 1 User (CA Pro 1 user)
KX-NSA205
Activation Key for CA PRO for 5 Users (CA Pro 5
users)
KX-NSA210
Activation Key for CA PRO for 10 Users (CA Pro 10
users)
KX-NSA240
Activation Key for CA PRO for 40 Users (CA Pro 40
users)
KX-NSA249
Activation Key for CA PRO for 128 Users (CA Pro 128
users)
KX-NSA301
Activation Key for CA ACD Monitor for 1 ICD
Supervisor (CA Supervisor)
KX-NSA401
Activation Key for CA Operator Console (CA Console)
KX-NSA901
Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 1 User (CA
Network 1 user)
KX-NSA905
Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 5 Users (CA
Network 5 users)
KX-NSA910
Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 10 Users (CA
Network 10 users)
KX-NSA940
Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 40 Users (CA
Network 40 users)
KX-NSA949
Activation Key for CA Network Plug-in for 128 Users
(CA Network 128 users)
KX-NSB0002
Activation Key for PSDN Option-1 (PSDN Option-1)
KX-NSB0003
Activation Key for PSDN Option-2 (PSDN Option-2)
KX-NSB0004
Activation Key for Poltys CCAccounting
KX-NSB0005
Activation Key for Poltys CCAccounting A.L.
KX-NSB0006
Activation Key for Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise
KX-NSB0007
Activation Key for Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise A.L.
KX-NSB0008
Activation Key for Poltys CCView
KX-NSB0009
Activation Key for Poltys CCView A.L.
KX-NSB0010
Activation Key for Poltys CCView add. PBX
KX-NSB0011
Activation Key for Poltys CCView add. PBX A.L.
KX-NSB0012
Activation Key for Poltys Number notice
Document Version 2016-03
System Components
Category
Document Version 2016-03
Model No.
Description
KX-NSB0013
Activation Key for Poltys Number notice A.L.
KX-NSB0014
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 Ports)
KX-NSB0016
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 Ports)
KX-NSB0404
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog (4 users)
KX-NSB0408
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog (8 users)
KX-NSB0412
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog (12 users)
KX-NSB0416
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog (16 users)
KX-NSB0424
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog (24 users)
KX-NSB0504
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog A.L. (4
users)
KX-NSB0508
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog A.L. (8
users)
KX-NSB0512
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog A.L. (12
users)
KX-NSB0516
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog A.L. (16
users)
KX-NSB0524
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Analog A.L. (24
users)
KX-NSB0608
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital (8 users)
KX-NSB0616
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital (16 users)
KX-NSB0624
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital (24 users)
KX-NSB0708
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (8
users)
KX-NSB0716
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (16
users)
KX-NSB0724
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord Digital A.L. (24
users)
KX-NSB0801
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI (1 Port)
KX-NSB0802
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI (2 Ports)
KX-NSB0901
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 Port)
KX-NSB0902
Activation Key for Poltys CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 Ports)
KX-NSB1001
Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor
KX-NSB1005
Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor (5 user
Bundle)
KX-NSB1101
Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L.
KX-NSB1105
Activation Key for Poltys CCView Supervisor A.L. (5
user Bundle)
KX-NSB1201
Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up
Installation Manual
5
System Components
Category
Model No.
Description
KX-NSB1205
Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up (5 user
Bundle)
KX-NSB1301
Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L.
KX-NSB1305
Activation Key for Poltys CCView CRM P-up A.L. (5
user Bundle)
KX-NSB1401
Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent
KX-NSB1405
Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent (5 user Bundle)
KX-NSB1501
Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent A.L.
KX-NSB1505
Activation Key for Poltys CCAgent A.L. (5 user Bundle)
KX-NSF101
Activation Key for CTI interface (CTI interface)
KX-NSF201
Activation key for Built-in ACD Report, Announcement
of waiting number for Queuing (Call Center Feature
Enhancement)
KX-NSXF021
Activation Key for Queue Position Announcement
(Queue Position Announcement)
KX-NSXF022
Activation Key for Built-in ACD report
(Built-in ACD report)
KX-NSF991
Expansion Capacity for KX-NS700 (Expansion
Capacity)
KX-NS5110
VoIP DSP Card (S Type) (DSP S)
KX-NS5111
VoIP DSP Card (M Type) (DSP M)
KX-NS5112
VoIP DSP Card (L Type) (DSP L)
KX-NS7134
SD Memory Card (XS Type) (SD XS)
KX-NS7135
SD Memory Card (S Type) (SD S)
KX-NS7136
SD Memory Card (M Type) (SD M)
Expansion Master
Slot
KX-NS7130
Expansion Master Card (EXP-M)
Remote Card Slot
KX-TDA0196
Remote Modem Card (RMT)
CO Line/Doorphone
Slot
KX-NS5162
Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2)
KX-NS5180
6-port Analog Trunk Card (LCOT6)
KX-NS5290
PRI Card (PRI23)
Physical Cards
DSP Card Slot
SD Memory Cards
Slot
6
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
System Components
Category
Extension Slot
*1
*2
Model No.
Description
KX-NS5170
4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC4)*2
KX-NS5171
8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)*2
KX-NS5172
16-port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)*2
KX-NS5173
8-Port SLT Card (MCSLC8)
KX-NS5174
16-Port SLT Card (MCSLC16)
Note that the types of activation keys are subject to change without notice. For CA activation keys, refer to the documentation for
CA.
When installing a DLC8, DLC16 or DHLC4 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
System Components for Expansion Unit
Category
Description
SPR
KX-NS720
Expansion Unit
CO Line/Doorphone Slot
KX-NS5162
Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2)
KX-NS5180
6-port Analog Trunk Card (LCOT6)
KX-NS5290
PRI Card (PRI23)
KX-NS5170
4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card (DHLC4)*1
KX-NS5171
8-Port Digital Extension Card (DLC8)*1
KX-NS5172
16-port Digital Extension Card (DLC16)*1
KX-NS5173
8-Port SLT Card (MCSLC8)
KX-NS5174
16-Port SLT Card (MCSLC16)
Extension Slot
*1
Model No.
When installing a DLC8, DLC16 or DHLC4 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
Equipment Compatibility for Main Unit
The PBX supports the following equipment:
Cell Stations
DECT 6.0
• DECT 6.0 2-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT 6.0 Portable
Station (KX-T0155)
• DECT 6.0 8-Channel Cell Station Unit Using a DHLC/DLC Card (PT-interface CS) for DECT 6.0 Portable
Station (KX-T0158)
• DECT 6.0 8-Channel IP Cell Station Unit Using a V-IPCS4 Card for DECT 6.0 Portable Station
(KX-NCP0158)
• DECT 6.0 4-Channel IP Cell Station Unit Using a V-IPCS4 Card for DECT 6.0 Portable Station
(KX-NS0154)
Doorphones
• Doorphone (KX-T30865, KX-T7765, KX-T7775)
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
7
System Components
Telephones
Panasonic Proprietary Telephones
• IP proprietary telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series)
• Digital proprietary telephone (e.g., KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series, KX-T7600 series)
• Analog proprietary telephone (e.g., KX-T7700 series)
• DSS Console (e.g., KX-DT390, KX-DT590, KX-T7640)
• IP softphones
• Portable stations (e.g., KX-TD7696, KX-WT125)
SIP Phones
• KX-UT series SIP phones (e.g., KX-UT133, KX-UT248, KX-UT670)
• KX-HDV series SIP phones
• KX-TGP600 SIP cordless phones
• IP conferencing phones (e.g., KX-NT700)
• Third party SIP phones (SIP hardphones/SIP softphones)
Other
• Single line telephones
• KX-NTV series
Note
•
•
•
For the equipment (e.g., Add-on Key Module, USB Module, Headset) that can be connected to a
particular telephone, refer to the telephone’s manual.
For other equipment that can be connected to the PBX, refer to "2.1.2 System Connection Diagram".
The PBX does not support the following Panasonic proprietary telephones:
– KX-NT136 IP proprietary telephone
– KX-NT400 IP proprietary telephone
– KX-HGT100 SIP telephone
– KX-TDA0300 PC Console
– KX-TDA0350 PC Phone
– KX-T7000 series proprietary telephone
– KX-T7200 series proprietary telephone
– KX-T7300 series proprietary telephone
– KX-T7400 series proprietary telephone
– KX-T7500 series proprietary telephone
Equipment Compatibility for Expansion Unit
You can connect supported Expansion Units to expand the usage of legacy terminals and CO lines.
If an Expansion Unit is connected to the Main Unit, the following equipment is also supported.
Telephones
Panasonic Proprietary Telephones
• Digital Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series, and KX-T7600 series)
• Portable Station (e.g., KX-TD7600 series, KX-TCA series)
• DSS Console (e.g., KX-DT390, KX-DT590, KX-T7640)
• Analog Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-T7700 series)
Note
The following Panasonic proprietary telephones are not available even if an expansion unit is connected:
• KX-TDA0300 PC Console
• KX-TDA0350 PC Phone
• KX-T7000 series proprietary telephone
8
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
System Components
•
•
•
•
KX-T7200 series proprietary telephone
KX-T7300 series proprietary telephone
KX-T7400 series proprietary telephone
KX-T7500 series proprietary telephone
Voice Processing System
Voice Processing System (e.g., KX-TVA series)
Notice
•
•
•
This PBX supports SIP extensions. However, some PBX features may not be available depending on the
type of telephone.
Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate
telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.
Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:
– interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product
– proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over
connected networks
Note
•
Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas. Please
consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
List of Abbreviations
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CA ® Communication Assistant
IP-PT ® IP Proprietary Telephone
PS ® Portable Station
SIP Extension ® Extensions of the PBX which use Session Initiation Protocol for communication.
SLT ® Single Line Telephone
APT ® Analog Proprietary Telephone
DPT ® Digital Proprietary Telephone
IP-CS ® IP Cell Station unit
P-SIP*1 ® Panasonic SIP Phone (KX-HDV series/KX-TGP600), Communication IP camera and Video door
phone (KX-NTV series)
*1
Operation of P-SIP phones depends on the PBX software file version and the firmware version of the P-SIP phone.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
9
Introduction
Introduction
This Installation Manual is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the Panasonic IP-PBX,
KX-NS700. It provides instructions for installing the hardware, and programming the PBX using Web
Maintenance Console. This PBX can also be programmed by using PT. Refer to the PT Programming Manual
for more information.
The Structure of this Manual
This manual contains the following sections:
Section 1 Safety Precautions
Provides important information intended to prevent personal injury and property damage.
Section 2 System Outline
Provides general information on the PBX, including the system capacity and specifications.
Section 3 Information about the Activation Keys
Provides information on activation keys, including how to obtain activation keys.
Section 4 Installation
Describes the procedures to install the PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, optional
service cards, and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided. Further information on system expansion
and peripheral equipment installation is included.
Section 5 Programming Information
Describes the installation procedure, structure, and functions of the Web Maintenance Console for
programming IP telephones and the PBX. Further information on programming the PBX for use with SIP
CO lines and a VoIP network is included.
Section 6 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
Provides information about stacking Expansion Unit.
Section 7 Troubleshooting
Provides information on the PBX and telephone troubleshooting.
Section 8 Networking Information
Provides information about topics such as using the PBX in a VoIP network, and the TCP ports used by
the PBX.
Section 9 Appendix
Provides information about System Prompt Languages and the revision history.
About the Other Manuals
Along with this Installation Manual, the following manuals are available:
Feature Manual
Describes all basic, optional and programmable features of the PBX.
PC Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PC.
PT Programming Manual
Provides step-by-step instructions for performing system programming using a PT.
Operating Manual
Provides operating instructions for end users using IP-PTs, SIP phones, SLTs, PSs, or DSS Consoles.
About the software version of your PBX
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of this
manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see "How do I confirm the software version of the PBX
or installed cards?" in "2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)" of the PC Programming Manual.
10
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Introduction
Trademarks
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use
•
•
•
of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.
Microsoft, Outlook, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
11
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Safety Precautions .................................................................................15
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
For Your Safety ...............................................................................................................16
Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................................22
Precautions ......................................................................................................................23
Data Security ...................................................................................................................24
F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION ..........................................25
2 System Outline .......................................................................................27
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
Basic System Construction ...........................................................................................28
System Configurations ...................................................................................................28
System Connection Diagram ..........................................................................................30
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................33
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................33
Specifications ..................................................................................................................36
General Description ........................................................................................................36
Characteristics ................................................................................................................38
System Capacity ............................................................................................................39
3 Information about the Activation Keys ................................................53
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Information about the Activation Keys .........................................................................54
Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys ............................................................54
Activation Key Code and Key Management System ......................................................68
Using CTI Applications ...................................................................................................69
4 Installation ..............................................................................................71
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.1.1
4.3.1.2
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6
4.3.7
4.3.8
4.4
4.5
4.5.1
12
Before Installation ...........................................................................................................72
Before Installation ...........................................................................................................72
Installation of the PBX ....................................................................................................74
Unpacking ......................................................................................................................74
Names and Locations .....................................................................................................75
Opening/Closing the Top Cover .....................................................................................77
Frame Ground Connection .............................................................................................80
Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards ............................................................81
Installing/Removing the SD Memory Card .....................................................................97
Types of Connectors ....................................................................................................100
19-inch Rack Mounting .................................................................................................101
Placing the PBX on a Desktop .....................................................................................102
Surge Protector Installation ..........................................................................................103
The Mother Board and Expansion Cards ....................................................................106
Mother Board ................................................................................................................106
Mother Board in the Main Unit ...................................................................................106
Mother Board in an Expansion Unit ...........................................................................109
SD Memory Cards ........................................................................................................110
DSP Cards ...................................................................................................................111
DLC2 in the Main Unit (installed by default) .................................................................113
MCSLC4 in the Main Unit (installed by default) ............................................................114
PFT in the Main Unit (installed by default) ...................................................................115
EXP-S in an Expansion Unit (installed by default) .......................................................117
RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196) ..................................................................118
Virtual Cards ..................................................................................................................119
Physical CO Line and Extension Cards ......................................................................121
LCOT6 Card (KX-NS5180) ...........................................................................................121
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Table of Contents
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
4.6
4.6.1
4.7
4.7.1
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.11.1
4.11.2
4.12
4.13
PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290) ............................................................................................122
DHLC4 Card (KX-NS5170) ..........................................................................................124
DLC8 Card (KX-NS5171) .............................................................................................125
DLC16 Card (KX-NS5172) ...........................................................................................126
MCSLC8 Card (KX-NS5173) ........................................................................................127
MCSLC16 Card (KX-NS5174) ......................................................................................128
Expansion Card .............................................................................................................129
EXP-M Card (KX-NS7130) ...........................................................................................129
The Doorphone Card ....................................................................................................131
DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162) .............................................................................................131
Connection of Extensions ............................................................................................133
Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable) ........................133
Parallel Connection of the Extensions ..........................................................................134
Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection .....................................................136
Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/or External Sensor .......................138
Connection of Peripherals ...........................................................................................140
LAN Connection ............................................................................................................142
LAN Connection for the Main Unit ................................................................................142
LAN Connections for IP Telephones ............................................................................144
Power Failure Connections ..........................................................................................147
Starting the PBX ............................................................................................................149
5 Programming Information ...................................................................153
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.6
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.9
5.10
5.11
Overview of Web Maintenance Console .....................................................................154
PC Connection ..............................................................................................................155
Starting Web Maintenance Console ............................................................................158
Programming the PBX ..................................................................................................168
Easy Setup Wizard .......................................................................................................168
Enabling the DHCP Server Feature .............................................................................173
Installing the Virtual IP Cards to the PBX .....................................................................173
Installing Additional Activation Keys .............................................................................174
Configuration of the Activation Keys ............................................................................174
Programming an H.323 QSIG Network ........................................................................176
Assigning the Hunt Pattern ...........................................................................................176
Programming the Address Translation Table ...............................................................177
Programming the Network Settings ..............................................................................179
Programming SIP CO Lines .........................................................................................181
Assigning Networking Information to IP Telephones ................................................183
Assigning IP Addressing Information ...........................................................................183
Setting VLAN Parameters ............................................................................................204
Setting LLDP Parameters .............................................................................................207
Setting Diffserv Parameters .........................................................................................210
Configuration of IP Ports ..............................................................................................213
ECO mode (KX-NT500 series only) .............................................................................219
Registering IP Telephones ...........................................................................................221
Registering IP Telephones ...........................................................................................221
De-registering IP Telephones .......................................................................................227
Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site .......................................................................230
Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway ...............236
Configuration of Users .................................................................................................245
Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice ..........................................................247
Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes .......................................................................251
6 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units ...............................................253
6.1
Methods of Stacking Expansion Units ........................................................................254
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
13
Table of Contents
7 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................257
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................258
Installation ....................................................................................................................258
Connection ...................................................................................................................261
Operation ......................................................................................................................262
Error Messages ............................................................................................................264
Restarting the PBX .......................................................................................................266
Troubleshooting by Error Log .......................................................................................268
8 Networking Information .......................................................................271
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
8.1.7
8.1.8
8.1.9
8.2
8.2.1
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.5
8.5.1
8.6
Information about Using an IP Network ......................................................................272
Using a VoIP Network with the PBX .............................................................................272
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server .................................................275
VLAN (Virtual LAN) ......................................................................................................276
Jitter Buffer ...................................................................................................................277
Voice Activity Detection (VAD) .....................................................................................277
Network Configuration ..................................................................................................278
Network Devices ..........................................................................................................282
QoS (Quality of Service) ...............................................................................................283
Network Time Protocol (NTP) ......................................................................................284
Information about Using a One-look Network ............................................................285
One-Look Network with NS-Net ...................................................................................285
H.323 CO Lines ..............................................................................................................287
Avoid Multiple IP Networks ...........................................................................................287
Gatekeeper ...................................................................................................................288
Bandwidth Assessment ................................................................................................288
Virtual VoIP Gateway Card Specifications ...................................................................291
SIP CO Lines ..................................................................................................................292
IP Telephony Service ...................................................................................................292
SIP Requirements ........................................................................................................295
Router Requirements ...................................................................................................295
Bandwidth Requirements .............................................................................................295
Virtual SIP CO Line Card Specifications ......................................................................297
Types of PBX Networks ................................................................................................298
H.323 QSIG Network ....................................................................................................298
Port Security ..................................................................................................................299
9 Appendix ...............................................................................................303
9.1
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
14
System Prompt Languages ..........................................................................................304
Revision History ............................................................................................................305
PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx ....................................................................305
PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx ....................................................................305
PFMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx ....................................................................306
PFMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx ....................................................................306
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 1
Safety Precautions
This section provides important information intended to
prevent personal injury and property damage.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
15
1.1 For Your Safety
1.1 For Your Safety
To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.
WARNING
This notice means that misuse could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION
This notice means that misuse could result in injury
or damage to property.
The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.
Notice
Panasonic assumes no responsibility for injuries or property damage resulting from failures arising out of
improper installation or operation inconsistent with this documentation.
16
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
1.1 For Your Safety
WARNING
For All Telephone Equipment
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the product in any other way than described in relevant manuals.
Do not install the product in a place exposed to rain or moisture, or a place where water, oil, or other liquids
can drip or splash onto on the product. Such conditions can lead to fire or electric shock, and may impair
the performance of the product.
Do not install the system in the following locations:
a. Areas where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong. Such activity may lead to the product falling
over and causing injury, or may impair the product’s performance.
b. Areas with high amounts of dust. High amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock, and impair
the performance of the product.
Do not place the product on an unstable or uneven surface. If the product were to fall over, it may cause
injury or damage to the product.
Do not supply power to a combination of devices that exceeds the total rated capacity of the wall outlets
or extension cables used. If outlets, power strips, extension cords, etc. are used in a manner that exceeds
their rated capacity, they emit large amounts of heat, which could cause a fire.
The product must only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel. The product should be
used as-is from the time of purchase; it should not be disassembled or modified. Disassembly or
modification can cause a fire, electric shock, or damage to the product.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
Small objects, such as the hook clip and SD card pose a choking hazard. Keep small objects out of reach
of children.
Products that require a power source should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply
specified on the product label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your office/home, consult
your dealer or local power company.
For safety purposes some products are equipped with a grounded plug. If you do not have a grounded
outlet, please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of
fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
a. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
b. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
c. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected
at the network interface.
d. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
e. Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.
Unplug the product from the wall outlet and have it serviced by qualified service personnel in the following
cases:
a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b. If liquid has been spilled into the product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
17
1.1 For Your Safety
d. If the product does not operate according to the operating instructions. Adjust only the controls that are
explained in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f. If product performance deteriorates.
For the PBX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
18
Do not insert foreign objects of any kind into this product, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.
Do not pull, bend, rest objects on, or chafe the power cord and plug. Damage to the power cord or plug
can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not attempt to repair the power cord or plug. If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed, contact
an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center for a replacement.
Do not leave the slot open if an option service card is not installed after removing a dummy cover plate.
Make sure to insert the slot cover included with the option service card into the slot.
When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, only use the 19-inch rack mounting equipment (attachment
bracket, screws) made for use with the PBX.
If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts, disconnect the power supply cord immediately and return
the unit to your dealer.
To prevent fires, electric shock, injury, or damage to the product, be sure to follow these guidelines when
performing any wiring or cabling:
a. Before performing any wiring or cabling, unplug the product’s power cord from the outlet. After
completing all wiring and cabling, plug the power cord back into the outlet.
b. When laying cables, do not bundle the product’s power cord with the power cords of other devices.
c. Do not place any objects on top of the cables connected to the PBX.
d. When running cables along the floor, use protectors to prevent the cables from being stepped on.
e. Do not run any cables under carpeting.
Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorized
Panasonic Factory Service Center.
The grounding wire of the AC cable has an effect against external noise and lightning strikes, but it may
not be enough to protect the PBX and to ensure electromagnetic compatibility. A permanent connection
between ground and the ground terminal of the PBX must be made.
Proper grounding (connection to ground) is very important to reduce the risk to the user of electrocution
or to protect the PBX from the bad effects of external noise in the case of a lightning strike. (See
"4.2.4 Frame Ground Connection".)
Plug the power cord firmly into an AC outlet. Otherwise, it can cause fire or electric shock.
Be careful not to drop any components. Dropping components may damage them or cause an injury.
Make sure that the AC outlet is properly grounded, then securely connect the 3-pin AC plug including the
grounded pin.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
1.1 For Your Safety
•
A lithium battery is used in the main unit. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with an
incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION
For All Telephone Equipment
•
•
The product should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C [104 °F]) and
vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Wipe the product with a soft cloth. Do not clean
with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzine or thinner. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners.
For the PBX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the system in the following locations:
a. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C [32 °F] to 40 °C [104 °F])
b. Areas where sulfuric gases may be present, such as near thermal springs.
c. Near devices that generate high frequencies, such as sewing machines or electric welders.
d. Locations where other objects will obstruct the area around the PBX. Be especially careful to leave at
least 5 cm (2 in) to the sides of the PBX for ventilation.
e. Locations where condensation can occur.
Do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at least 20 cm (8 in) above and 10 cm (4 in) at the
sides of the PBX.
When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at least
10 cm (4 in) around the PBX’s fan.
When the PBX is placed on a desktop, make sure that the PBX is placed as indicated in "4.2.9 Placing
the PBX on a Desktop". Do not place it on its side or upside down.
When installing or removing the SD Memory Card, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother board.
Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
When installing or removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
board. Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
Once you have started the PBX, if you unplug the PBX, do not initialize it again as described in "System
Initialization Procedure". Otherwise, your programmed data will be cleared. To restart the PBX, refer to
"7.1.5 Restarting the PBX".
Before touching the product (PBX, cards, etc.), discharge static electricity by touching ground or wearing
a grounding strap. Failure to do so may cause the PBX to malfunction due to static electricity.
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No.26 AWG or larger (e.g., 24 AWG) UL Listed or CSA Certified
Telecommunication Line Cord.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
19
1.1 For Your Safety
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20
When relocating the equipment, first disconnect the telecom connection before disconnecting the power
connection. When the unit is installed in the new location, reconnect the power first, and then reconnect
the telecom connection.
The plug of power supply cordset is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is
located near the equipment and is easily accessible.
Slots and openings in the front, back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation; to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked
by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface while in use. The product should never
be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in a sealed
environment unless proper ventilation is provided.
Make sure that the surface behind the PBX is not made of wood.
When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the rack.
Use only the AC power cord included with the PBX. A certified power supply cord has to be used with this
equipment. The relevant national installation and/or equipment regulations shall be considered. A certified
power supply cord not lighter than ordinary polyvinyl chloride flexible cord according to IEC 60227
(designation H05VV-F 3G 0.75 mm²) shall be used.
When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, make sure that the installation of the unit does not cause the
temperature of the rack to exceed its limit.
Before opening the top cover, the AC power cord must be removed from the AC inlet.
For safety reasons, close the top cover and tighten the screws before operating the PBX.
If the PBX is not installed properly using the securing correct methods, the PBX may fall causing serious
damage.
Performing surge protection is essential. Make sure to follow the instructions in "4.2.10 Surge Protector
Installation".
It is strongly recommended to use TLS encrypted communication when the PC is accessing the PBX via
the Internet. To use TLS encryption, routers must have a port set up for https communication.
Avoid using the same AC outlet for computers and other office equipment, as noise generated by such
equipment may hamper system performance or interrupt the system.
Unplug the system from its power source when wiring, and plug the system back in only after all wiring is
completed.
CO lines should be installed with surge protectors. For details, refer to "4.2.10 Surge Protector
Installation".
When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch must be turned off.
For grounding wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor
must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.
When connecting a PRI23 card to the CO line, connect through an NT1; do not connect to the U interface
of the CO line directly.
PRI ports of PRI23 cards are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
The MOH port and Pager port are SELV ports and should only be connected to approved SELV devices.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
1.1 For Your Safety
Notice
For All Telephone Equipment
• Read and understand all instructions.
For the PBX
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as
fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of
the PBX.
• If you are having problems making calls to outside destinations, follow this procedure to test the CO
lines:
a. Disconnect the PBX from all CO lines.
b. Connect known working SLTs to those CO lines.
c. Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs.
If a call cannot be carried out correctly, there may be a problem with the CO line that the SLT is
connected to. Contact your telephone company.
If all SLTs operate properly, there may be a problem with your PBX. Do not reconnect the PBX to the
CO lines until it has been serviced by an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
21
1.2 Important Safety Instructions
1.2 Important Safety Instructions
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use the product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub,
in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Rack Mount Instructions—The following or similar rack-mount instructions are included with the installation
instructions:
a. Elevated Operating Ambient—If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration
should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient
temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
b. Reliable Earthing—Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular
attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit
(e.g., use of power strips).
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
22
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
1.3 Precautions
1.3 Precautions
Password Security
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
program the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, refer to "1.1.3 Entering Characters" in the PC Programming Manual.
6. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC,
and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of
the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogram it. Therefore, we strongly
recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the
system data, refer to "6.1 Tool—System Data Backup" in the PC Programming Manual.
However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not
allow unauthorized access to these files.
Notice for users in California
This product contains a CR coin cell lithium battery that
contains perchlorate material—special handling may
apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
23
1.4 Data Security
1.4 Data Security
In order to use the PBX safely and correctly, the Security Requirements below must be observed. Failure to
do so may result in:
• Loss, leakage, falsification or theft of user information.
• Illegal use of the PBX by a third party.
• Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party.
What is User Information?
User Information is defined as:
1. Information stored on the SD Memory Card:
Sound files for UM feature and call charge data.
2. Information sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device:
System data, sound files for MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Messages), and activation key
files.
Requirements
1. Always make backups of data stored on the System memory and/or perform regular system data backups
to a USB memory device.
For details about making backups of data stored on the System memory, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
For details about backing up the system data to a USB memory device, refer to "6.1 Tool—System Data
Backup" in the PC Programming Manual.
2. To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate a Firewall.
3. To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping the password secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random password that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your password regularly.
4. Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party.
a. Make a backup of data stored on the System memory.
5. When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device, the confidentiality of that
information becomes the responsibility of the customer. Before disposing of the PC or the USB memory
device, ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and/or rendering it physically
unusable.
24
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
1.5 F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION
1.5 F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT
INFORMATION
1. Notification to the Telephone Company
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On
the side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format
US: ACJIS01BKX-NS700. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer. If required, provide the telephone
company with the following technical information:
• Telephone numbers to which the system will be connected
• Make: Panasonic
• Model: KX-NS700
• Certification No.: found on the side of the unit
• Ringer Equivalence No.: 0.1B
• Facility Interface Code: 02LS2, 04DU9.BN/DN/1KN/1SN
• Service Order Code: 9.0F, 6.0P
• Required Network Interface Jack: RJ11, RJ48C
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive
RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices
that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US: ACJIS01BKX-NS700. The
digits represented by 01 are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 01 is a REN of 0.1). For earlier products,
the REN is separately shown on the label.
Incidence of Harm to the Telephone Lines
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't practical, the
telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to
file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities, Equipment, Operations and
Procedures
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice
in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
Trouble with this equipment
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please see the attached
warranty, which includes the Service Center Directory. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is
resolved.
Connection to Party Line
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission or corporation commission for information.
Combined Use with Alarm Equipment
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation
of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable
alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
25
1.5 F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION
•
•
•
26
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate this device.
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
The software contained in the ARS and TRS features to allow user access to the network must be
upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed
into service. Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes
as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer's employees from gaining access
to the network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 2
System Outline
This section provides general information on the PBX,
including the system capacity and specifications.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
27
2.1.1 System Configurations
2.1 Basic System Construction
2.1.1 System Configurations
Main Unit
The main unit contains a mother board for controlling PBX functions.
Stacking Expansion Unit KX-NS720
Up to 3 Expansion Units can be connected to a Main Unit to expand the usage of legacy terminals and CO
lines. An Expansion Unit connected to the Main Unit will be controlled by the Main Unit. To connect an
Expansion Unit, install an EXP-M card in the Main Unit. Then, connect the EXP-M card and the EXP-S which
is in Expansion Unit directly with Category 5e cable.
For details about connecting KX-NS700 and Expansion Unit KX-NS720, see "4.6.1 EXP-M Card
(KX-NS7130)".
Note
This PBX requires an activation key Expansion Capacity for KX-NS700 (KX-NSF991) to use the Expansion
Unit.
Main Unit *1
EXP-M
Expansion Unit *2
EXP-S
*1
*2
28
Expansion Unit *2
EXP-S
Expansion Unit *2
EXP-S
KX-NS700
KX-NS720
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.1.1 System Configurations
One-Look Network with NS-Net
*1
Multiple KX-NS series PBXs can be connected as a distributed networked system using a private IP network.
The networked system is called a One-look network. In a One-look network, a KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the
Master unit, which controls the other PBXs, known as Slave units.
For more information about One-look network, refer to "8.2 Information about Using a One-look Network".
*1
NS-Net is a network protocol only used for Panasonic products.
H.323 QSIG network
If the network will include non-KX-NS700 PBXs (e.g., KX-TDE200, KX-NCP500), then an H.323 QSIG network
is necessary.
An H.323 QSIG network is preferable if strict resource separation between sites is necessary. In a QSIG
network, resources are not available to extension users of other PBXs without explicit programming.
For details about programming the H.323 QSIG network, refer to "5.5 Programming an H.323 QSIG
Network".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
29
2.1.2 System Connection Diagram
2.1.2 System Connection Diagram
Private
IP Network
ITSP*1
Network
WAN
Router
Remote PC
IP-PT
IP Softphone,
CA*3 Client PC
IP-CS
PS CTI Server
PC
SIP Phone
DCE*2
(e.g., ADSL Modem)
Expansion Unit*5
Main Unit*4
Expansion Unit*5
CO Line
(Telephone Company Lines)
Analog/PRI
SLT
PC
Expansion Unit*5
External Sensor
Fax Machine
Doorphone & Door Opener
BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)
PC
Pager/ Amplifier
Speaker
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
30
ITSP: Internet Telephony Service Provider
DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
CA: Communication Assistant
KX-NS700
KX-NS720
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.1.2 System Connection Diagram
Main Unit*2 System Connection Diagram
ISDN PRI Line
(Digital CO Line)
EXP-M
PRI23
EXP-S
Telephone
Company
EXP-S
EXP-S
DPH2
Analog
CO Line
External Sensor
LCOT6
Doorphone & Door Opener
Pre-installed
MCSLC4
MCSLC8/16
SLT
Radio
Amplifier
Wireless Phone
Fax Machine
Pre-installed
DLC2
DHLC4*3
Pager/Speaker
APT
DSS
Console
DPT
DSS
Console
DPT I/F
CS
PS
DLC8/DLC16*3
RMT
USB
USB Memory Device
DPT*1
DPT*1
DPT*1
PC
SD Memory
Card XS Type
DSP S
SD Memory
Card S Type
DSP M
Uninterruptible Power
Supply
SD Memory
Card M Type
DSP L
Virtual Slot
PC
Private IP
Network
Router
*2
*3
V-IPEXT32
V-IPGW16
V-SIPEXT32
V-SIPGW16
V-UTEXT32
WAN
DCE
Router
ITSP
Network (e.g., ADSL
Modem)
*1
V-IPCS4
SIP Phone
IP-CS
PS
LAN
IP-PT
IP Softphone,
CA Client PC
PC
CTI Server
Mountable Equipment
Some DPTs are not available for this connection.
KX-NS700
When using a DLC8, DLC16 or DHLC4 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
31
2.1.2 System Connection Diagram
Expansion Unit*2 System Connection Diagram
ISDN PRI Line
(Digital CO Line)
PRI23
Telephone
Company
EXP-S
EXP-M
DPH2
Analog
CO Line
Doorphone & Door Opener
LCOT6
External Sensor
MCSLC8/16
SLT
DHLC4*3
APT
Wireless Phone
DSS
Console
DPT
Fax Machine
DSS
Console
DPT I/F
CS
PS
DLC8/DLC16*3
USB
Mountable Equipment
DPT*1
*1
*2
*3
32
DPT*1
DPT*1
PC
Some DPTs are not available for this connection.
KX-NS720
When using a DLC8, DLC16 or DHLC4 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.2.1 Optional Equipment
2.2 Optional Equipment
2.2.1 Optional Equipment
KX-NS700
Model No.
Model Name
Description
KX-NS5110
VoIP DSP Card (S Type) (DSP S)
KX-NS5111
VoIP DSP Card (M Type) (DSP M)
KX-NS5112
VoIP DSP Card (L Type) (DSP L)
A DSP card is a digital signal processor card with
DSP resources that can be used for VoIP calls,
conferences, the Unified Messaging feature, and
the DISA/OGM feature. The DSP cards are
compliant with ITU-T G.729A and G.711 codec
methods.
Depending on the amount of your DSP resource
needs, DSP S, DSP M, or DSP L cards can be
installed. The number of resources provided by
each type of DSP card is as follows:
• DSP S card: 63
• DSP M card: 127
• DSP L card: 254
One of DSP cards can be installed on the
motherboard.
To operate VoIP or Unified Messaging, one of
DSP S, DSP M or DSP L card must be installed
in the DSP card slot.
KX-NS7134
SD Memory Card (XS Type) (SD
Memory XS)
A combination card with the following
characteristics:
• Memory with maximum of 40 hours Voice
Mail recording time.
• Memory with Maximum of 40,000 SMDR
data
• Store 300,000 ACD report data
• Announces the number of calls in the waiting
queue ahead of the caller and the estimated
waiting time.
• You cannot install commercially available SD
card.
KX-NS7135
SD Memory Card (S Type) (SD
Memory S)
A combination card with the following
characteristics:
• Memory with maximum of 200 hours Voice
Mail recording time.
• Memory with Maximum of 40,000 SMDR
data
• Store 300,000 ACD report data
• Announces the number of calls in the waiting
queue ahead of the caller and the estimated
waiting time.
• You cannot install commercially available SD
card.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
33
2.2.1 Optional Equipment
Model No.
Model Name
Description
KX-NS7136
SD Memory Card (M Type) (SD
Memory M)
A combination card with the following
characteristics:
• Memory with maximum of 400 hours Voice
Mail recording time.
• Memory with Maximum of 40,000 SMDR
date
• Store 300,000 ACD report data
• Announces the number of calls in the waiting
queue ahead of the caller and the estimated
waiting time.
• You cannot install commercially available SD
card.
KX-NS5162
Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2)
2-port doorphone card for 2 doorphone, 2 door
opener, and 2 external sensor.
KX-NS7130
Expansion Master Card (EXP-M)
A stacking card to be installed in a Main Unit. Up
to 3 Expansion Units can be connected.
KX-NS5180
6-port Analog Trunk Card
(LCOT6)
6 analog CO line ports with Caller ID (FSK/FSK
with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID]/
DTMF). Two ports are power failure transfer
(PFT) ports.
KX-NS5290
PRI Card (PRI23)
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B
channels).
NI (North American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.
KX-NS5170
4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension
Card (DHLC4)
4-port digital hybrid extension card with Caller ID
(FSK) for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and
PT-interface CSs.
When installing DHLC4 card in KX-NS700, LPR
software version must be 2.0 or later.
KX-NS5171
8-Port Digital Extension Card
(DLC8)
8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
When installing DLC8 card in KX-NS700, LPR
software version must be 2.0 or later.
KX-NS5172
16-port Digital Extension Card
(DLC16)
16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
When installing DLC16 card in KX-NS700, LPR
software version must be 2.0 or later.
KX-NS5173
8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card (MCSLC8)
8-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID
(FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
KX-NS5174
16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card (MCSLC16)
16-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID
(FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
Note
For the maximum number of optional service cards that can be installed in the PBX, refer to "2.3.3 System
Capacity".
34
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.2.1 Optional Equipment
KX-NS720
Model No.
Model Name
Description
KX-NS5162
Doorphone Interface Card (DPH2)
2-port doorphone card for 2 doorphone, 2 door
opener, and 2 external sensor
KX-NS5180
6-port Analog Trunk Card
(LCOT6)
6 analog CO line ports with Caller ID (FSK/FSK
with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID]/
DTMF). Two ports are power failure transfer
(PFT) ports.
KX-NS5290
PRI Card (PRI23)
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B
channels).
NI (North American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.
KX-NS5170
4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension
Card (DHLC4)
4-port digital hybrid extension card with Caller ID
(FSK) for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and
PT-interface CSs.
When installing DHLC4 card in KX-NS700, LPR
software version must be 2.0 or later.
KX-NS5171
8-Port Digital Extension Card
(DLC8)
8-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
When installing DLC8 card in KX-NS700, LPR
software version must be 2.0 or later.
KX-NS5172
16-port Digital Extension Card
(DLC16)
16-port digital extension card for DPTs, DSS
consoles, and PT-interface CSs.
When installing DLC16 card in KX-NS700, LPR
software version must be 2.0 or later.
KX-NS5173
8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card (MCSLC8)
8-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID
(FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
KX-NS5174
16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card (MCSLC16)
16-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID
(FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
35
2.3.1 General Description
2.3 Specifications
2.3.1 General Description
KX-NS700
Main CPU
Cortex A8 600 MHz
Power Input
100 V AC to 130 V AC: 2.2 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC: 1.3 A;
50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption (when fully
mounted)
Normal rated power 104 VA
Memory Backup Duration
7 years
Dialing
CO Line
Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialing with Caller ID (FSK/DTMF)
1600 W Maximum
Extension
Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialing with Caller ID (FSK)
Port 1-2 (on pre-installed MCSLC4) support PFT in combination
with the port 1-2 (on an LCOT6) connected to an analog CO
line respectively.
Mode Conversion
DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Ring Frequency
20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)
Operating
Environment
Temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Humidity
10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
Conference Call Trunk
32 parties (Default) / 96 parties (DSP card installed)
(10 ´ 3-party conference call, 12 ´ 8-party conference call, etc.)
Music on Hold (MOH)
Internal MOH port: 8 ports (Level Control: 31.5 dB to +31.5 dB
per 0.5 dB)
External MOH port: 2 ports (Available exclusively with EPG
[External Paging])
MOH: Selectable Internal/External Music Source Port
External Paging
Maximum 2 Ports (Volume Control: -15.5 dB to per 0.5 dB)
(Available exclusively with MOH)
LAN Port
1 (for LAN connection)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
(Auto MDI/MDI-X)
Extension Connection Cable
SLT
1-pair wire (T, R)
DPT
1-pair wire (D1, D2)
APT
2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)
PT-interface CS
1-pair wire (D1, D2)
PT-interface CS (High-density)
4-pair wire (D1, D2)
DSS Console and Add-on Key
Module
1-pair wire (D1, D2)
36
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.1 General Description
Air-cooling method
FAN
Dimension
430 mm (W) ´ 88 mm (H) ´ 335 mm (D)
(17 in ´ 3-1/2 in ´ 13-1/4 in)
Weight (when fully mounted)
Under 5.0 kg*1
(11.02 lb)
*1
Except the 19-inch rack mounting equipment
KX-NS720
Main CPU
Cortex A8 300 MHz
Power Input
100 V AC to 130 V AC: 2.2 A/200 V AC to 240 V AC: 1.3 A;
50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption (when fully
mounted)
Normal rated power 104 VA
Memory Backup Duration
7 years
Dialing
CO Line
Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialing with Caller ID (FSK/DTMF)
1600 W Maximum
Extension
Dial Pulse (DP) 10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialing with Caller ID (FSK)
Mode Conversion
DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP
Ring Frequency
20 Hz/25 Hz (selectable)
Operating
Environment
Temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Humidity
10 % to 90 % (non-condensing)
Extension Connection Cable
SLT
1-pair wire (T, R)
DPT
1-pair wire (D1, D2)
APT
2-pair wire (T, R, D1, D2)
PT-interface CS
1-pair wire (D1, D2)
PT-interface CS (High-density)
4-pair wire (D1, D2)
DSS Console and Add-on Key
Module
1-pair wire (D1, D2)
Air-cooling method
FAN
Dimension
430 mm (W) ´ 88 mm (H) ´ 335 mm (D)
(17 in ´ 3-1/2 in ´ 13-1/4 in)
Weight (when fully mounted)
Under 5.0 kg*1
(11.02 lb)
*1
Except the 19-inch rack mounting equipment
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
37
2.3.2 Characteristics
2.3.2 Characteristics
KX-NS700
SLT: 600 W including set
Doorphone: 20 W
Terminal Equipment Loop Limit
•
•
Minimum Leakage Resistance
15 000 W minimum
Maximum Number of Extension
Instruments per Line
1 for SLT
Ring Voltage
75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
Central Office Loop Limit
1600 W maximum
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range
24 ms to 2032 ms
Door Opener Current Limit
24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
External Sensor Current Limit
Power to the external sensor is provided from the DPH2 card and must
be grounded through the DPH2 card. For the connection diagram,
refer to "4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)". The PBX detects input from
the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Paging Terminal Impedance
600 W
MOH (Music on Hold) Terminal
Impedance
10 000 W
KX-NS720
38
SLT: 600 W including set
Doorphone: 20 W
Terminal Equipment Loop Limit
•
•
Minimum Leakage Resistance
15 000 W minimum
Maximum Number of Extension
Instruments per Line
1 for SLT
Ring Voltage
75 Vrms at 20 Hz/25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
Central Office Loop Limit
1600 W maximum
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range
24 ms to 2032 ms
Door Opener Current Limit
24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
External Sensor Current Limit
Power to the external sensor is provided from the DPH2 card and must
be grounded through the DPH2 card. For the connection diagram,
refer to "4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)". The PBX detects input from
the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Paging Terminal Impedance
600 W
MOH (Music on Hold) Terminal
Impedance
10 000 W
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.3 System Capacity
2.3.3 System Capacity
Type and Maximum Number of Slots
The PBX supports the following type and number of slots.
Mother Board (Main Unit)
Slot Type
Physical Slot
Virtual Slot
*1
Maximum Number
DSP Card Slot
1
SD Card Slot
1
EXP-M Card Slot
1
CO Line/Doorphone Slot
2*1
Extension Free Slot
2
Remote Card Slot
1
Virtual CO Line Card
4
Virtual Extension Card
4
Virtual IP-CS Card
8
For details about the available installation combination of cards, see "CO Line Option Card Installing Restrictions".
Mother Board (Expansion Unit)
Slot Type
Physical Slot
*1
Maximum Number
CO Line/Doorphone Slot
2*1
Extension Free Slot
2
For details about the available installation combination of cards, see "CO Line Option Card Installing Restrictions".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
39
2.3.3 System Capacity
Main Unit
Front View
A
Inside View (The top cover is removed.)
B
C
D
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
40
E
F G H
I
Front cover plate for the EXP-M Slot
Front cover plates for CO Line/Doorphone Card Slots
Front cover plates for the Extension Card Slots
Extension Card Slot
CO Line/Doorphone Card Slot
EXP-M Card Slot
SD Card Slot
DSP Card Slot
RMT Card Slot
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.3 System Capacity
Expansion Unit
Front View
Inside View (The top cover is removed.)
A
B
C
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
D
E
Front cover plates for CO Line/Doorphone Card Slots
Front cover plates for the Extension Card Slots
Extension Card Slot
CO Line/Doorphone Card Slot
SD Card Slot (not available)
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
41
2.3.3 System Capacity
Virtual Slots of the Mother Board
Example:
V-SIPEXT32
V-SIPGW16
V-IPEXT32
V-IPGW16
V-UTEXT32
V-IPCS4
Virtual Slots
Mother Board
42
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.3 System Capacity
Maximum Optional Service Cards
The following number of card can be installed in the Physical Slots or Virtual Slots of the PBX.
Note
•
•
Any card that exceeds the capacity of the PBX will be ignored.
When the PBX starts up with an invalid configuration, some cards will be ignored.
For KX-NS700 Physical Slot
Slot type
Pre-installed
Card Name
Maximum Number
MCSLC4
1
DLC2
1
DSP Card Slot
1
DSP S
1
DSP M
1
DSP L
1
SD Card Slot
1
SD XS
1
SD S
1
SD M
1
Remote Card Slot
RMT
1
EXP-M Card Slot
EXP-M
1
CO Line/Doorphone Slot
Extension Slot
*1
2
LCOT6
2
PRI23
1
DPH2
1
DHLC4*1
2
DLC8*1
2
MCSLC8
2
MCSLC16
2
DLC16*1
2
When installing a DLC8, DLC16 or DHLC4 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
Cards Installed in Virtual Slots
Card Type
Virtual CO Line Card
Document Version 2016-03
Card Name
Maximum Number
4
Installation Manual
43
2.3.3 System Capacity
Card Type
Card Name
Maximum Number
V-IPGW16
2
V-SIPGW16
4
Virtual Extension Card
Virtual IP-CS Card
4
V-IPEXT32
4
V-SIPEXT32
4
V-UTEXT32
4
V-IPCS4
8
Card Name
Maximum Number
DPH2
1
LCOT6
2
PRI23
1
MCSLC16
2
MCSLC8
2
DLC16*1
2
DLC8*1
2
DHLC4
2
For KX-NS720 Physical Slot
Slot type
CO Line/Doorphone Slot
Extension Slot
*1
44
*1
When installing a DLC8, DLC16 or DHLC4 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.3 System Capacity
CO Line Option Card Installing Restrictions
The following tables show which combinations of optional CO line cards can be installed.
ü: Available
—: Not available
KX-NS700
2nd Slot
1st Slot
*1
LCOT6
PRI23
DPH2
LCOT6
ü
ü
ü
PRI23
ü
—*1
ü
DPH2
ü
ü
—*1
This installation combination is not available due to software restrictions.
KX-NS720
2nd Slot
1st Slot
*1
LCOT6
PRI23
DPH2
LCOT6
ü
ü
ü
PRI23
ü
—*1
ü
DPH2
ü
ü
—*1
This installation combination is not available due to software restrictions.
Extension Option Card Installing Restrictions
There are no restrictions on the available combinations of optional extension cards, so long as the maximum
number of cards for the extension type is not exceeded.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
45
2.3.3 System Capacity
Maximum CO Lines, Extensions, VMs, PFT ports and MOHs/Pagers
The PBX supports the following number of CO lines and extensions.
CO Line
Total Number of CO
Lines
KX-NS700
(Maximum)
KX-NS700
w/1
KX-NS720
KX-NS700
w/2
KX-NS720s
KX-NS700
w/3
KX-NS720s
0
93
122
151
180
0
29
58
87
116
LCOT
0
12
24
36
48
PRI23
0
23
46
69
92
CO Line (Physical
CO Line Card)
CO Line (Virtual CO
Line Card)
0
64
H.323 CO Lines
0
32
SIP CO Lines
0
64
Total Number of
Extensions*1
6*1
166*1
198*1
230*1
262*1
6*1
38*1
70*1
102*1
134*1
SLT
4
36
68
100
132
DPT*1
2*1
34*1
66*1
98*1
130*1
APT
0
8
16
24
32
56
64
Extension (Physical
Extension Card)*1
Extension (Virtual
Extension Card)
0
32*2/128*3
IP-PT and
Softphone
0
32*2/128*3
SIP Extension
0
32*2/128*3
SIP Phone
0
32*2/128*3
P-SIP
0
32*2/128*3
KX-UT
Series
0
32*2/128*3
Total Number of CS
46
KX-NS700
(Pre-Installe
d)
Installation Manual
2
40
48
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.3 System Capacity
CO Line
KX-NS700
(Pre-Installe
d)
KX-NS700
(Maximum)
KX-NS700
w/1
KX-NS720
KX-NS700
w/2
KX-NS720s
KX-NS700
w/3
KX-NS720s
DPT-CS (2ch)
2
8
16
24
32
DPT-CS (8ch)
0
4
8
12
16
IP-CS (8ch)
0
16
IP-CS (4ch/8ch)
0
32
Total Number of PS
Total Number of
Doorphone
128
0
2
4
6
8
Doorphone
0
2
4
6
8
Door Opener
0
2
4
6
8
Sensor
0
2
4
6
8
VM
SVM (ch)
Built-In UM (ch)
2
0
TVA unit
DSS Console
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
24
2
2
8
PFT
2
MOH/BGM/EPG
2
MOH/BGM
2*4
EPG
2*5
This number does not include Digital XDP connections. For details about the maximum number of DPTs including Digital XDP
connections, see "Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection Capacity" in "2.3.3 System Capacity".
If optional activation key KX-NSF991 is not activated.
If optional activation key KX-NSF991 is activated.
Available exclusively with EPG.
Available exclusively with MOH/BGM.
Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection Capacity
The number of Digital XDP ports that can be assigned depends on the following:
– the number of connected DPTs
– the maximum number of DPTs the PBX can support
The table below shows examples of how many Digital XDP ports can be assigned with different configurations.
For details about the Digital XDP connection, refer to "4.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP)
Connection".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
47
2.3.3 System Capacity
KX-NS700 w/
o option
KX-NS700
max.
KX-NS700 w/
1 KX-NS720
KX-NS700 w/
2 KX-NS720
KX-NS700 w/
3 KX-NS720
No. of DPT ports
2
34
(16´2+2)
66
(16´4+2)
98
(16´6+2)
130
(16´8+2)
No. of Digital XDP
ports
2
24
50
(24+26)
76
(24+26´2)
102
(24+26´3)
Total No. of DPTs
4
48
(24+24)
101
(48+27+26)
154
(48+53´2)
207
(48+53´3)
Power Supply Unit Capacity
The pre-installed power supply unit (PSU) in each PBX supports a different load figure.
PBX Model
Maximum Load Figure
KX-NS700
40
KX-NS720
40
Load Figure Calculation
Equipment Type
PT
CS
SLT
Item
Load Figure
DPT
1
DSS Console
1
D-XDP
0.5
APT
1.5
IP-PT
0
SIP-EXT
0
DPT I/F CS (2ch)
2
DPT I/F CS (8ch)
8
DHLC4
4
SLC8
8
SLC16
16
KX-NS700
(Preinstalled SLC)
4
Calculation Example of KX-NS700
Item
48
Units
Load Figure
DPT (KX-DT series)
24
24
D-XDP
24
12
SLT
4
4
IP-PT (KX-NT series)
5
0
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.3 System Capacity
Item
SIP-EXT
Units
Load Figure
2
0
Total Load Figure
40
Calculation Example of KX-NS720
Item
Units
Load Figure
DPT (KX-DT series)
27
27
D-XDP
26
13
SLT
0
0
Total Load Figure
Document Version 2016-03
40
Installation Manual
49
2.3.3 System Capacity
DSP Resources
DSP cards provide digital signal processor (DSP) resources, and the PBX uses the resources to perform
various PBX operations. The following illustration shows the concept of DSP resource usage. More complex
situations may require additional resources, and in some cases the amount of DSP resources required may
be less than expected.
: Required DSP Resources
3
0.5
Conference
Doorphone*2*4
1
2
1
Outgoing Message
(DISA)*3
PRI *2*4
SLT*2*4
1
Music on Hold (MOH)/
External Paging (EPG)*3
1
1
Analog
CO Line*2*4
1
Internal
DPT/APT*2*4
MOH*3
G.711
Unified Messaging
2.2
1
1.3
G.729A
IP-PT
2
1
G.711
G.711
3
2.2
G.729A
2.2
1
UM Tone Generator
G.729A
IP-CS
Echo Canceller*3
PS
IP CO Line*1
*1
*2
*3
*4
PBX
Connections that arrive over a stacking connection require the same amount of DSP resources as shown in this example.
DSP resources are used during conversations between legacy CO lines/extensions/Doorphones and IP CO lines/extensions.
DSP resources are used when IP CO lines or IP extensions access these devices.
DSP resources are not used during conversations between legacy CO lines and legacy extensions.
Required DSP Resources Assessment
The maximum number of simultaneous calls, operations and features using IP protocols is determined by the
DSP card installed in the PBX.
To decide how much resources are required for the PBX, the DSP Resource Advisor can be useful.
50
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
2.3.3 System Capacity
Note
•
•
•
•
•
Calls cannot be made or received when all of the DSP resources are being used.
The number of required resources must not exceed the DSP resources installed to the PBX.
For details about the DSP Resource Advisor, refer to "9.33.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1]
Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor" in the PC Programming Manual.
For information about installing DSP cards, refer to "4.3.3 DSP Cards".
The number of available DSP resources is not restricted by any activation keys.
DSP Resource Reservation
DSP resources can be reserved for certain operations to avoid lack of resources for particular operations.
The following examples show cases of allocating and reserving DSP resources.
Note
For details about reserving DSP resources, refer to "5.1.16 DSP Resource Advisor" and "5.1.17 DSP
Resource Reservation" in the Feature Manual, and "9.33.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1]
Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor" in the PC Programming Manual.
Example
In this example, the DSP M (127 DSP resources) is installed and resources are reserved for the following
operations:
Operation
VoIP (G.711) Calls
40
Conference CO Lines
10
Unified Messaging
8
Two-way Recording Operations
*1
Required Resources
3
OGM Operations
10
UM Tone (Fixed)
2*1
Because the system reserves 2 resources for internal system functions, the total amount of available resources indicated will be 2
less than the total resources of the installed card.
Reserved Resources
(40 x 1) + (10 x 0.5) + {(8-3) x 1.3} + (3 x 2.3) + (10 x 2) + 2
= 80.4
Free Resources
= 127 - 80.4
= 46.6
Note
This is an example for a PBX without any stacking Expansion Unit.
Expandable Resources with Expansion Unit
The following table shows the types of resources that are available when an Expansion Unit used with the
Main Unit.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
51
2.3.3 System Capacity
Notice
When Expansion Units are used with the Main Unit, all IP-PTs and IP-CSs are registered to the Main Unit.
Type
Optional Service Card
Terminal
Activation Key
*1
52
Resource
Availability
Physical Card for Legacy CO Lines and Extensions
ü
Virtual Card
–*1
RMT Card
–
DPH Card
ü
DSP Card
–
DPT/APT/SLT
ü
PT-interface CS
ü
PS
ü
IP-CS/IP-PT/KX-UT Series SIP Phone
–*1
Doorphone
ü
IP Softphone
–*1
Any Activation key
–
IP terminals, except for KX-NT265 (software version 2.00 or later only), are registered and controlled by the Main Unit.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 3
Information about the Activation Keys
This section provides information on activation keys,
including how to obtain activation keys.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
53
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
3.1 Information about the Activation Keys
Activation keys are required to use IP CO lines and IP telephones on a private IP network with the PBX. Also,
to upgrade the software to use enhanced features, the corresponding activation keys for that feature are
required. Some activation keys are provided by default, some are provided free for a limited period, and others
are provided separately as activation key files.
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
The PBX supports the following type and number of activation keys.
When the number of preinstalled activation keys is not enough for the desired configuration or when you wish
to use enhanced features, additional activation keys in the form of activation key files can be installed using
Web Maintenance Console.
Note
•
•
•
Store the downloaded activation key files in your PC or a memory device. They can then be reinstalled
in an emergency situation.
For information about how to obtain the additional activation keys, refer to "3.1.2 Activation Key Code
and Key Management System".
For information about how to install the activation key files using Web Maintenance Console, refer to
"5.4.4 Installing Additional Activation Keys".
System
Model No.
KX-NSF991
Activation Key Type
Expansion Capacity
Description
Maximum Activation
Keys
Increases the IP extension
capacity from 32 to 128
extensions, and allows the
connection of up to 3 Expansion
Units.
1 activation key
Description
Maximum IP CO
Lines
IP CO Lines
Model No.
Activation Key Type
KX-NSM102
2 IP Trunk
Allows the use of 2 IP CO lines
(H.323/SIP).
KX-NSM104
4 IP Trunk
Allows the use of 4 IP CO lines
(H.323/SIP).
KX-NSM108
8 IP Trunk
Allows the use of 8 IP CO lines
(H.323/SIP).
KX-NSM116
16 IP Trunk
Allows the use of 16 IP CO lines
(H.323/SIP).
*1
*2
54
64 IP CO lines
(H.323/SIP)*1*2
You need to set the number of installed activation keys to be used for H.323 CO lines through system programming. By default, all
installed activation keys will be used for SIP CO lines.
The maximum number of IP CO lines for H.323 is 32.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
IP Telephone Capacity
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSM201
1 IPSoftphone/IP PT/
SIP-MLT/P-SIP
Allows the use of 1 IP-PT/IP
softphone/KX-UT series SIP
phone/P-SIP Extension.
KX-NSM205
5 IPSoftphone/IP PT/
SIP-MLT/P-SIP
Allows the use of 5 IP-PTs/IP
softphones/KX-UT series SIP
phones/P-SIP Extensions.
KX-NSM210
10 IPSoftphone/IP PT/
SIP-MLT/P-SIP
Allows the use of 10 IP-PTs/IP
softphones/KX-UT series SIP
phones/P-SIP Extensions.
KX-NSM220
20 IPSoftphone/IP PT/
SIP-MLT/P-SIP
Allows the use of 20 IP-PTs/IP
softphones/KX-UT series SIP
phones/P-SIP Extensions.
KX-NSM501
1 IP PT/SIP-MLT/
P-SIP
Allows the use of 1 IP-PT/
KX-UT series SIP phone/P-SIP
Extension.
KX-NSM505
5 IP PT/SIP-MLT/
P-SIP
Allows the use of 5 IP-PTs/
KX-UT series SIP phones/P-SIP
Extensions.
KX-NSM510
10 IP PT/SIP-MLT/
P-SIP
Allows the use of 10 IP-PTs/
KX-UT series SIP phones/P-SIP
Extensions.
KX-NSM520
20 IP PT/SIP-MLT/
P-SIP
Allows the use of 20 IP-PTs/
KX-UT series SIP phones/P-SIP
Extensions.
KX-NSM701
1 SIP Extension
Allows the use of 1 IP
Conferencing Phone/third party
SIP phone.
KX-NSM705
5 SIP Extension
Allows the use of 5 IP
Conferencing Phones/third party
SIP phones.
KX-NSM710
10 SIP Extension
Allows the use of 10 IP
Conferencing Phones/third party
SIP phones.
KX-NSM720
20 SIP Extension
Allows the use of 20 IP
Conferencing Phones/third party
SIP phones.
*1
*2
Maximum IP
Telephones
Total 128 IP-PTs/IP
softphones/KX-UT
series SIP phones/
P-SIP Extensions*1
Total 128 IP-PTs/
KX-UT series SIP
phones/P-SIP
Extensions
[4 IP-PTs/KX-UT
series SIP phones/
P-SIP Extensions]*2
Total 128 IP
Conferencing Phones/
third party SIP phones
You can set how many IP softphones can be used with the installed activation keys through system programming. By default, only
IP softphones can be used with the installed activation keys.
The capacity given in [square brackets] shows the number of activation keys preinstalled on the mother board.
Note
•
When using a KX-TGP600, depending on the registration status of the wireless handsets, up to 8
activation keys for IP PT/SIP-MLT/P-SIP may be required.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
55
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
IP-CS Channel Expansion
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSE201
1 IP-CS channel
expansion
Increases the number of
communication channels from 4
to 8 for 1 IP-CS (KX-NS0154
only).
KX-NSE205
5 IP-CS channel
expansion
Increases the number of
communication channels from 4
to 8 for 5 IP-CSs (KX-NS0154
only).
KX-NSE210
10 IP-CS channel
expansion
Increases the number of
communication channels from 4
to 8 for 10 IP-CSs (KX-NS0154
only).
KX-NSE220
20 IP-CS channel
expansion
Increases the number of
communication channels from 4
to 8 for 20 IP-CSs (KX-NS0154
only).
Maximum Activation
Keys
32
Note
•
•
When performing channel expansion for IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) change the status of the IP-CS port
to OUS, then enable the channel expansion setting. (See "9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Main— Channel expansion" in the PC Programming
Manual.)
To apply the channel expansion, the IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) must be reset by changing their port
status from OUS to INS. (See "9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port
Property—V-IPCS—Main— Connection" in the PC Programming Manual.)
Feature Manual References for Related Features of Activation Keys
10.1.16 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)
Networking
Maximum Activation Keys
Model No.
KX-NSN001
KX-NSN002
*1
56
Activation Key Type
One-look Network
QSIG Network
Description
Allows the use of multi-site
connections using One-look
network feature.
Allows the use of enhanced
QSIG network features (NDSS,
Centralized Voice Mail, etc.).
Stand-alone
System
One-look
Network
–
16 activation
keys*1
1 activation key
This activation key must be installed to each PBX in the One-look network.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Feature Manual References for Related Features of Activation Keys
One-look Network
• 14.1.4 One-look Networking
QSIG Network
• Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs
• Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs
• 15.1.14 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
• 15.1.15 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
• 15.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—Enhanced Features
Unified Messaging System (Features)
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
Maximum Activation
Keys
KX-NSU002
Two-way REC Control
Allows a manager/administrator
to use the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature to record other
users.
1 activation key
Allows the automatic backup of
messages.
1 activation key
KX-NSU003
Message Backup
Feature Manual References for Related Features of Activation Keys
Two-way REC Control
20.1.7 Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
Message Backup
20.1.74 Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore
Unified Messaging System (Unified Messaging Ports)
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSU102
2 UM Port
Allows the use of 2 Unified
Messaging ports.
KX-NSU104
4 UM Port
Allows the use of 4 Unified
Messaging ports.
*1
Maximum Unified
Messaging Ports
24 Unified Messaging
ports
[2 Unified Messaging
ports]*1
The capacity given in [square brackets] shows the number of activation keys preinstalled on the mother board.
Feature Manual References for Related Features of Activation Keys
20.1.1 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES
Unified Messaging System (Mailbox)
E-mail clients (IMAP4) and e-mail notification (voice) can be used without installing any activation keys.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
57
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Unified Messaging System (Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer Users)
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSU301
2way REC 1 User
Allows the use of Two-way
Recording/Two-way Transfer for
1 user.
KX-NSU305
2way REC 5 Users
Allows the use of Two-way
Recording/Two-way Transfer for
5 users.
KX-NSU310
2way REC 10 Users
Allows the use of Two-way
Recording/Two-way Transfer for
10 users.
KX-NSU320
2way REC 20 Users
Allows the use of Two-way
Recording/Two-way Transfer for
20 users.
KX-NSU399
2way REC All Users
Allows the use of Two-way
Recording/Two-way Transfer up
to the system’s limit.
Maximum Users
The same number as
the maximum number
of allowable extensions
Feature Manual References for Related Features of Activation Keys
20.1.83 Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer
Cellular Phone Extension
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSE101
1 Mobile User
Allows the use of 1 cellular phone
extension.
KX-NSE105
5 Mobile Users
Allows the use of 5 cellular phone
extensions.
KX-NSE110
10 Mobile Users
Allows the use of 10 cellular
phone extensions.
KX-NSE120
20 Mobile Users
Allows the use of 20 cellular
phone extensions.
Maximum Cellular
Phone Extensions
The same number as
the maximum number
of allowable extensions
Feature Manual References for Related Features of Activation Keys
• 4.1.13 CELLULAR PHONE FEATURES
• 5.1.10 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
• 7.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
• 10.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
• 15.1.16 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
• 15.1.17 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
58
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Communication Assistant (CA) User
Activation
Key Type
Model No.
Maximum Activation
Keys
Description
KX-NSA010
CA Thin
Client
Allows the use of CA Client in a thin-client
environment.
KX-NSA020
CSTA
Multiplexer
Allows the use of CSTA Multiplexer.
KX-NSA201
CA Pro 1
user
Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 1 user.*1
KX-NSA205
CA Pro 5
users
Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 5 users.*1
KX-NSA210
CA Pro 10
users
Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 10 users.*1
KX-NSA240
CA Pro 40
users
Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 40 users.*1
KX-NSA249
CA Pro 128
users
Allows the use of CA Client Pro for 128
users.*1
KX-NSA301
CA
Supervisor
Allows the use of CA Client Supervisor for 1
user.
KX-NSA401
CA Console
Allows the use of CA Client Operator Console
for 1 user.
KX-NSA901
CA Network
1 user
Allows the use of CA Server network features
for 1 user.
KX-NSA905
CA Network
5 users
Allows the use of CA Server network features
for 5 users.
KX-NSA910
CA Network
10 users
Allows the use of CA Server network features
for 10 users.
KX-NSA940
CA Network
40 users
Allows the use of CA Server network features
for 40 users.
KX-NSA949
CA Network
128 users
Allows the use of CA Server network features
for 128 users.
*1
1
4
The same number as
the maximum number
of allowable extensions
A maximum of 416 CA users can be registered. However, CA Server is necessary to register more than 240 CA users.
CTI License
Model No.
KX-NSF101
Activation Key Type
CTI interface
Description
Maximum Activation
Keys
Allows the use of the 3rd Party
CTI interface.
1
Feature Manual References for Related Features of Activation Keys
4.1.24 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
59
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Partner License
Activation keys for partner devices are stored in the PBX. Partner devices refer to the activation keys in the
PBX and determine whether they are enabled or disabled. A maximum number of 16 partner devices can refer
to the activation keys and operate simultaneously. However, limitations on partner devices connected through
devices connected directly to the PBX depend on the specifications of the directly connected devices. The
PBX does not limit these devices.
Note
•
For information about purchasing licenses, consult the partner entity or your dealer.
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSB0004
Poltys CCAccounting
Allows the use of Poltys
CCAccounting.
KX-NSB0005
Poltys CCAccounting
A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys
CCAccounting A.L.
KX-NSB0006
Poltys CCAcc.
Enterprise
Allows the use of Poltys CCAcc.
Enterprise.
KX-NSB0007
Poltys CCAcc.
Enterprise A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys CCAcc.
Enterprise A.L.
KX-NSB0008
Poltys CCView
Allows the use of Poltys
CCView.
KX-NSB0009
Poltys CCView A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
A.L.
KX-NSB0010
Poltys CCView add.
PBX
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
add. PBX.
KX-NSB0011
Poltys CCView add.
PBX A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
add. PBX A.L.
KX-NSB0012
Poltys Number notice
Allows the use of Poltys Number
notice.
KX-NSB0013
Poltys Number notice
A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys Number
notice A.L.
KX-NSB0014
Poltys CCRecord SIP
(4 Ports)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord SIP (4 Ports).
KX-NSB0016
Poltys CCRecord SIP
A.L. (4 Ports)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord SIP A.L. (4 Ports).
60
Installation Manual
Maximum Activation Keys
Combined total for licenses:
350/system
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
(Continued)
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSB0404
Poltys CCRecord
Analog (4 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog (4 users).
KX-NSB0408
Poltys CCRecord
Analog (8 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog (8 users).
KX-NSB0412
Poltys CCRecord
Analog (12 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog (12 users).
KX-NSB0416
Poltys CCRecord
Analog (16 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog (16 users).
KX-NSB0424
Poltys CCRecord
Analog (24 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog (24 users).
KX-NSB0504
Poltys CCRecord
Analog A.L. (4 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog A.L. (4 users).
KX-NSB0508
Poltys CCRecord
Analog A.L. (8 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog A.L. (8 users).
KX-NSB0512
Poltys CCRecord
Analog A.L. (12 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog A.L. (12
users).
KX-NSB0516
Poltys CCRecord
Analog A.L. (16 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog A.L. (16
users).
KX-NSB0524
Poltys CCRecord
Analog A.L. (24 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Analog A.L. (24
users).
KX-NSB0608
Poltys CCRecord
Digital (8 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Digital (8 users).
KX-NSB0616
Poltys CCRecord
Digital (16 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Digital (16 users).
KX-NSB0624
Poltys CCRecord
Digital (24 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Digital (24 users).
KX-NSB0708
Poltys CCRecord
Digital A.L. (8 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Digital A.L. (8 users).
Document Version 2016-03
Maximum Activation Keys
Combined total for licenses:
350/system
Installation Manual
61
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
(Continued)
Model No.
Activation Key Type
KX-NSB0716
Poltys CCRecord
Digital A.L. (16 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Digital A.L. (16
users).
KX-NSB0724
Poltys CCRecord
Digital A.L. (24 users)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord Digital A.L. (24
users).
KX-NSB0801
Poltys CCRecord PRI
(1 Port)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord PRI (1 Port).
KX-NSB0802
Poltys CCRecord PRI
(2 Ports)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord PRI (2 Ports).
KX-NSB0901
Poltys CCRecord PRI
A.L. (1 Port)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord PRI A.L. (1 Port).
KX-NSB0902
Poltys CCRecord PRI
A.L. (2 Ports)
Allows the use of Poltys
CCRecord PRI A.L. (2 Ports).
KX-NSB1001
Poltys CCView
Supervisor
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
Supervisor.
KX-NSB1005
Poltys CCView
Supervisor (5 user
Bundle)
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
Supervisor (5 user Bundle).
KX-NSB1101
Poltys CCView
Supervisor A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
Supervisor A.L.
KX-NSB1105
Poltys CCView
Supervisor A.L. (5 user
Bundle)
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
Supervisor A.L. (5 user Bundle).
KX-NSB1201
Poltys CCView CRM
P-up
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
CRM P-up.
KX-NSB1205
Poltys CCView CRM
P-up (5 user Bundle)
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
CRM P-up (5 user Bundle).
KX-NSB1301
Poltys CCView CRM
P-up A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
CRM P-up A.L.
KX-NSB1305
Poltys CCView CRM
P-up A.L. (5 user
Bundle)
Allows the use of Poltys CCView
CRM P-up A.L. (5 user Bundle).
62
Installation Manual
Description
Maximum Activation Keys
Combined total for licenses:
350/system
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
(Continued)
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSB1401
Poltys CCAgent
Allows the use of Poltys
CCAgent.
KX-NSB1405
Poltys CCAgent (5 user
Bundle)
Allows the use of Poltys CCAgent
(5 user Bundle).
KX-NSB1501
Poltys CCAgent A.L.
Allows the use of Poltys CCAgent
A.L.
KX-NSB1505
Poltys CCAgent A.L. (5
user Bundle)
Allows the use of Poltys CCAgent
A.L. (5 user Bundle).
KX-NSB0002
PSDN Option-1
KX-NSB0003
PSDN Option-2
Allows the use of the option
feature of PSDN
(Panasonic System
Development Network).
Maximum Activation Keys
Combined total for licenses:
350/system
16
System connection diagram for the integration with the Communication Bridge
[Without CA server]
CSTA Connection
(1st party)
PBX
Communication
Bridge
Max. users without CA Server: 240*1
[With CA server]
CSTA
Connection CA Server
(3rd party)
PBX
CSTA
Connection Communication
Bridge
(1st party)
Max. users with CA server: 416*1
*1
Combined with number of CA Client users.
Call Center Feature Enhancement
Model No.
KX-NSF201
Activation Key Type
Call Center Enhance
Document Version 2016-03
Description
Maximum Activation
Keys
Allows the use of queuing
information announcement, ICD
group monitor by ACD
supervisor, and creation of ACD
reports.
1
Installation Manual
63
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
Maximum Activation
Keys
KX-NSXF021
Queue Position
Announcement
Allows the use of queuing
information announcement.
1
KX-NSXF022
Built-in ACD report
Allows the use of ICD group
monitor by ACD supervisor, and
creation of ACD reports.
1
Packaged Activation Keys
These packaged activation keys include multiple activation keys. Installing one packaged activation key allows
you to install multiple activation key features at once.
For details of each feature, refer to relevant section of this manual:
• E-mail (IMAP4) client and e-mail notification (voice/fax messages)
® Unified Messaging System (Mailbox)
• Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer
® Unified Messaging System (Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer Users)
• Cellular phone extension
® Cellular Phone Extension
• CA Client Pro
® Communication Assistant (CA) User
Model No.
Activation Key Type
Description
KX-NSP101
Adv. Pkg 1 User
Allows the use of the following activation key
features for 1 user:
• E-mail (IMAP4) client and e-mail notification
(voice/fax messages)
• Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer
• Cellular phone extension
• CA Client Pro
KX-NSP105
Adv. Pkg 5 Users
Allows the use of the following activation key
features for 5 users:
• E-mail (IMAP4) client and e-mail notification
(voice/fax messages)
• Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer
• Cellular phone extension
• CA Client Pro
KX-NSP110
Adv. Pkg 10 Users
Allows the use of the following activation key
features for 10 users:
• E-mail (IMAP4) client and e-mail notification
(voice/fax messages)
• Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer
• Cellular phone extension
• CA Client Pro
64
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Model No.
KX-NSP120
Activation Key Type
Adv. Pkg 20 Users
Description
Allows the use of the following activation key
features for 20 users:
• E-mail (IMAP4) client and e-mail notification
(voice/fax messages)
• Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer
• Cellular phone extension
• CA Client Pro
Preinstalled Activation Keys in the Mother Board
Preinstalled activation keys with no expiration date
The following type and number of activation keys are preinstalled on the mother board.
Activation Key
Activated Features
CA Basic-Express
No Limit
IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension (ch)
4 IP-PTs/KX-UT series SIP phones/P-SIP
Extensions
UM Port (ch)
2 Unified Messaging ports
Example: Preinstalled Activation Keys in the Mother Board
Preinstalled activation keys for free trial
The following activation keys are preinstalled on the mother board for the 60-days free trial. They will expire
60 days after pressing the Activate Pre-installed Activation key button to begin the free trial.
Activation Key
One-look Network
Two-way Recording Control
Message Backup
Two-way Recording (30 users)
Mobile Extension (30 users)
Document Version 2016-03
Activated Features
One-look networking feature
Automatic Two-way Recording feature
Automatic backup of messages
30 Two-way Recording/Two-way Transfer users
30 cellular phone extensions
Installation Manual
65
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Activation Key
CA PRO (128 users)
CA Supervisor (1 user)
CA Operator Console (1 user)
CA Thin Client Server
CTI interface
CSTA Multiplexer
Call Center Feature Enhancement
Activated Features
128 CA Pro users
1 CA Supervisor user
1 CA Console user
Use CA in a thin-client environment
3rd Party CTI interface
Multiplexing for CSTA connections
Built-in ACD Report, Announcement of waiting
number for queuing
Poltys CCAccounting
Poltys CCAcc. Enterprise
Poltys CCView
Poltys CCView add. PBX
Poltys CCView Supervisor (5 users)
Allows the use of the Poltys features.
Poltys CCView CRM P-up (5 users)
Poltys Number notice
Poltys CCAgent (5 users)
Poltys CCRecord SIP (4 ports)
Activation Key Installation Example
The following illustration shows an example of when using 16 SIP CO lines, 16 H.323 CO lines, 10 IP-PTs, 12
IP softphones, and 10 KX-UT series SIP phones on a private IP network using the mother board.
66
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
Example:
Desired Item:
10 IP-PTs
12 IP softphones
Required Activation Key:
KX-NSM520
KX-NSM220
Desired Item:
16 SIP CO lines
Required Activation Key:
KX-NSM116
Desired Item:
16 H.323 CO lines
Required Activation Key:
KX-NSM116
V-SIPGW16
V-IPEXT32
V-IPGW16
V-UTEXT32
Virtual Slots
Desired Item:
10 KX-UT series
SIP phones
Required Activation Key:
KX-NSM510
Mother Board
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
67
3.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System
3.1.2 Activation Key Code and Key Management System
To obtain additional activation keys, you need to purchase the appropriate activation key codes and access
the Key Management System. You can download the activation keys as an activation key file from the Key
Management System.
To download the activation keys, enter the MPR ID number shown on the back of the main unit, and activation
key number and registration ID provided on each activation key code.
For information about the type of activation key codes available, refer to "3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number
of Activation Keys".
For details about installing the downloaded activation key file(s) in the PBX memory using Web Maintenance
Console, refer to "5.4.4 Installing Additional Activation Keys".
Note
•
•
•
•
•
•
68
You can only download the activation key file once using the activation key number and registration ID
provided on the activation key code.
Up to 8 activation keys can be downloaded as one activation key file.
Up to 997 activation key files can be installed in the PBX memory.
It is possible to send the activation key file to a specified e-mail address at the same time as
downloading it to a PC.
Make sure to backup the downloaded activation key files on your PC.
When the mother board has to be replaced due to a system malfunction, the MPR ID for the mother
board is no longer valid. In this case, you need a temporary activation key for maintenance purposes.
The temporary activation key can only be used for a limited time period, and can be downloaded from
the Key Management System in the same way as downloading activation key files.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
3.1.3 Using CTI Applications
3.1.3 Using CTI Applications
To use CTI applications with the PBX, KX-NSF101 (CTI interface) is required. One KX-NSF101 supports one
CTI application. However, Communication Assistant (CA) Server does not require KX-NSF101.
In the example below, one KX-NSF101 is required for using one CTI application.
Example 1
PBX
Single CSTA
Connection
CTI Server
In the example below, an activation key is not required to use CA Server.
Example 2
PBX
Single CSTA
Connection
CA Server
To use 2 or more CTI applications, the CSTA Multiplexer application is required, along with one KX-NSA020
(CSTA Multiplexer) for each CTI application. KX-NSF101 is included in KX-NSA020. Therefore, when
KX-NSA020 is installed, KX-NSF101 is not required.
In the example below, three KX-NSA020 are required for three CTI applications. (CA Server does not require
a KX-NSA020.)
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
69
3.1.3 Using CTI Applications
Example 3
Panasonic
CSTA Multiplexer
PBX
CTI Application Server
Single CSTA
Connection
CTI Application Server
CTI Application Server
CA Server
Note
•
•
•
•
•
70
Up to 4 CTI application servers can be used at the same time when using a CSTA multiplexer.
An Activation Key for Multiple CSTA Connection (KX-NSA020) is required for each CTI application.
When a 3rd party CSTA multiplexer is used, a CTI interface activation key (KX-NSF101) is required
for the CSTA connection. (In this case, Activation Key for Multiple CSTA Connection [KX-NSA020] is
not required.)
For details regarding KX-NSF101, refer to "CTI License" in "3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of
Activation Keys".
For details regarding KX-NSA020, refer to "Communication Assistant (CA) User" in "3.1.1 Type and
Maximum Number of Activation Keys".
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 4
Installation
This section describes the procedures to install the
PBX. Detailed instructions for planning the installation
site, installing the main unit and optional service cards,
and cabling of peripheral equipment are provided.
Further information on peripheral equipment installation
is included.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
71
4.1.1 Before Installation
4.1 Before Installation
4.1.1 Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the PBX and terminal
equipment.
Be sure to comply with all applicable laws, regulations, and guidelines.
Notice
Panasonic assumes no responsibility for injuries or property damage resulting from failures arising out of
improper installation or operation inconsistent with this documentation.
Safety Installation Instructions
WARNING
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
• Anti-static precautions should be taken during installation.
Installation Precautions
The PBX is suitable for mounting on a 19-inch rack or placing on a desktop, and should be installed in a location
where it is accessible for inspections and maintenance.
To prevent malfunction, noise, or discoloration, follow the instructions below:
WARNING
Do not install the system in the following locations:
• Areas where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong. Such activity may lead to the product
falling over and causing injury, or may impair the product’s performance.
• Areas with high amounts of dust. High amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock, and
impair the performance of the product.
CAUTION
Do not install the system in the following locations:
• In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C [32 °F] to 40 °C [104 °F])
• Areas where sulfuric gases may be present, such as near thermal springs.
• Near devices that generate high frequencies, such as sewing machines or electric welders.
• Locations where other objects will obstruct the area around the PBX. Be especially careful to leave at
least 5 cm (2 in) to the sides of the PBX for ventilation.
• Locations where condensation can occur.
Notice
Do not install the system in the following locations:
72
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.1.1 Before Installation
•
On or near computers, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is
preferable not to install the system in the same room as the above equipment.)
• Within 1.8 m (6 ft) of radios and televisions. (Both the PBX and PTs should be at least 1.8 m (6 ft) away
from such devices.)
Do not perform the following:
• Do not block the openings of the PBX.
• Do not stack up the optional service cards.
Wiring Precautions
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:
CAUTION
•
•
•
Avoid using the same AC outlet for computers and other office equipment, as noise generated by such
equipment may hamper system performance or interrupt the system.
Unplug the system from its power source when wiring, and plug the system back in only after all wiring
is completed.
CO lines should be installed with surge protectors. For details, refer to "4.2.10 Surge Protector
Installation".
Notice
•
•
•
•
Use 1-pair telephone cables when connecting SLTs, data terminals, answering machines, computers,
etc.
Mis-wiring may cause the PBX to operate improperly. Refer to "Section 4 Installation" when wiring
the system.
If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and connect
it again, or turn off the PBX using the power switch, then turn it on again.
Use twisted pair cable for CO line connection.
Preparing the Network Environment
Be sure to prepare your network’s environment for the installation of the PBX according to the intended PBX
networking configuration. For details about PBX network configurations, refer to "Section 8 Networking
Information".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
73
4.2.1 Unpacking
4.2 Installation of the PBX
4.2.1 Unpacking
KX-NS700
Unpack the box and check the items below:
• Main unit
• AC power cord
• Hook clip
• 19-inch rack attachment bracket x 2
• Screw x 6 (For 19 inch rack)
KX-NS720
Unpack the box and check the items below:
• Expansion unit
• AC power cord
• Hook clip
• 19-inch rack attachment bracket x 2
• Screw x 6 (For 19 inch rack)
• Stacking cable x 1 (RJ45 connector, CAT 5e cable)
74
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.2 Names and Locations
4.2.2 Names and Locations
KX-NS700
Front
Back/Inside
A BCDE
I
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
F
J
G
K
L
H
M
N
PQ R
O
S
T
STATUS Indicator
System Mode Switch
LAN Port
USB Port
EXP-M slot
CO Line/Doorphone Free Slot
Top Cover
Extension Free Slot
PBX MODE indicator
PFT Port
EPG/MOH Ports
DPT Port
SLT Ports
Sub Board
Main Board
FG Terminal
AC Inlet
MPR ID
Power Switch
FAN
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
75
4.2.2 Names and Locations
KX-NS720
Front
A
B
Back/Inside
C
D
E
F
HI
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
76
G
J
K
STATUS Indicator
EXP-S Port
CO Line/Doorphone Free Slot
Top Cover
Extension Free Slot
Sub Board
Main Board
FG Terminal
AC Inlet
Power Switch
FAN
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover
4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover
Opening the Top Cover
KX-NS700/KX-NS720
CAUTION
Before opening the top cover, the AC power cord must be removed from the AC inlet.
1. Confirm that the power switch is turned off and disconnect the power cable.
Power Switch
Note
In order to turn off the PBX’s power, a system shutdown using Web Maintenance Console must first
be performed. For details, refer to "5.4 System Control—System Shutdown" in the PC Programming
Manual.
2. Turn the screws counterclockwise to loosen.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
77
4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover
3. Slide the top cover then lift it off.
4. Remove the support bar from the PBX.
Closing the Top Cover
1. Place the support bar onto the PBX.
78
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover
2. Place the top cover onto the PBX. Then slide the top cover until it closes properly.
3. Turn the screws clockwise to tighten.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, close the top cover and tighten the screws before operating the PBX.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
79
4.2.4 Frame Ground Connection
4.2.4 Frame Ground Connection
KX-NS700/KX-NS720
1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen the screw.
Insert a grounding wire (user-supplied).
Tighten the screw.
Connect the grounding wire to ground.
Screw
Grounding wire
To ground
WARNING
•
•
Proper grounding (connection to ground) is very important to reduce the risk to the user of
electrocution or to protect the PBX from the bad effects of external noise in the case of a
lightning strike.
The grounding wire of the AC cable has an effect against external noise and lightning strikes,
but it may not be enough to protect the PBX and to ensure electromagnetic compatibility. A
permanent connection between ground and the ground terminal of the PBX must be made.
CAUTION
For grounding wire, green-and-yellow insulation is required, and the cross-sectional area of the conductor
must be more than 0.75 mm2 or 18 AWG.
Notice
Be sure to comply with applicable local regulations (e.g., laws, guidelines).
In most of the continental United States, the ground provided by the "Third wire ground" at the commercial
power outlet will be satisfactory. However, in a small percentage of cases this ground may be installed
incorrectly. Therefore, the following test procedure should be performed.
Test Procedure
1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter and set it for a possible reading of up to 250 V AC.
2. Connect the meter probes between the 2 main AC voltage points on the wall outlet. The reading obtained
should be 108 V AC to 132 V AC.
3. Move one of the meter probes to the 3rd prong terminal (GND). Either the same reading or a reading of 0
volt should be obtained.
4. If a reading of 0 volt at one terminal and a reading of 108 V AC to 132 V AC at the other terminal is not
obtained, the outlet is not properly grounded. This condition should be corrected by a qualified electrician
(per article 250 of the National Electrical Code).
5. If a reading of 0 volt at one terminal and a reading of 108 V AC to 132 V AC at the other terminal is obtained,
then set the meter to the "OHMS/RX1" scale, place one probe at the GND Terminal and the other probe
at the terminal which gave a reading of 0 volt. A reading of less than 1 ohm should be obtained. If the
reading is not obtained, the outlet is not adequately grounded. See qualified electrician.
80
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
CAUTION
•
•
•
Before touching the product (PBX, cards, etc.), discharge static electricity by touching ground or
wearing a grounding strap. Failure to do so may cause the PBX to malfunction due to static electricity.
When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch must be turned off.
When installing or removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
board. Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
Note
Make sure the AC power cord is not connected to the AC inlet of the PBX.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
81
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
Installing a DSP Card in a DSP Card Slot
1. Place the front end of the card under the hook, and then lower the rear end of the card so that the holes
of the card are aligned with the screw holes.
82
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
2. Insert the screws into the holes on the card, and tighten the screws to secure the card.
Screws
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
83
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
Removing a DSP Card Installed in the DSP Card Slot
1. Loosen and remove the screws.
Screws
2. Holding the rear end of the card, pull the card in the direction of the arrows.
Installing an Optional Service Card in the Free Slot
In the Main Unit KX-NS700 and Expansion Unit KX-NS720, there are Free slots for CO Line/Doorphone cards
and Free slots for Extension cards. In Free slots for CO Line/Doorphone cards, you can install the following
84
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
cards: LCOT6, PRI23, and DPH2 card. In Free slots for Extension cards, you can install the following cards:
DHLC4*1, DLC8*1, DLC16*1, MCSLC8, MCSLC16. For details, refer to the description of each optional service
card in "4.5 Physical CO Line and Extension Cards" and "4.7 The Doorphone Card".
*1
When installing a DHLC4, DLC8 or DLC16 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
KX-NS700
CO Line/Doorphone Card Slots
Extension Card Slots
Document Version 2016-03
KX-NS720
CO Line/Doorphone Card Slots
Extension Card Slots
Installation Manual
85
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
1. Remove the dummy cover plate for the Free slot.
Cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth.
Dummy Cover Plate
Cut here.
Correct
Incorrect
Note
When removing the dummy cover plate, use plastic nippers. We do not recommend using a knife such
as a retractable utility knife.
86
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
2. Position the card in the open slot, making sure that the tabs on the both sides of the card fit into place.
Then, holding the card firmly in place, lower the rear end so that the holes of the card are aligned with the
screw holes.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
87
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
3. Insert the spacers into the holes on the card, and tighten the spacers to secure the card.
Spacer
Note
When using an MCSLC8 or MCSLC16 card with a DLC16 card, install the DLC16 card in the bottom
slot.
4. Connect cables to appropriate ports of the card. For details about pin assignments, refer to the appropriate
section in "4.5 Physical CO Line and Extension Cards".
Note
Make sure to connect cables after installing the card in the PBX, not before.
88
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
Removing Optional Service Card from the Free Slot
1. Loosen and remove the spacers.
Spacer
2. Holding the rear end of the card, pull the card in the direction of the arrows.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
89
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
Installing the EXP-M Card in the EXP-M Card slot
1. Remove the dummy cover plate for the EXP-M card.
Cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth.
Dummy Cover Plate
Cut here.
Correct
Incorrect
Note
When removing the dummy cover plate, use plastic nippers. We do not recommend using a knife such
as a retractable utility knife.
90
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
2. Position the card in the EXP-M card slot, making sure that the extension bolts are aligned with the holes
in the card and that the tabs on both sides of the card fit into place. Then, holding the card firmly in place,
lower the rear end so that the holes of the card are aligned with the extension bolts.
1
2
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
91
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
3. Insert the screws into the holes on the card, and tighten the screws to secure the card.
Screws
4. Connect cables to the appropriate ports of the card. For details about pin assignments, refer to the
appropriate section in "4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS7130)".
Note
Make sure to connect the cables after installing the card in the PBX, not before.
92
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
Removing the EXP-M Card from the EXP-M Card slot
1. Loosen and remove the screws.
Screws
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
93
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
2. Holding the rear end of the card, pull the card in the direction of the arrows.
94
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
Slot covers
Only remove the dummy cover plates when you are planning to install an optional service card. If you do not
install an optional service card, insert a slot cover included with the option service card, as shown in the
following procedure.
To insert a slot cover
1. With the clip-side of the slot cover on the left, insert the right edge of the cover in the slot.
Slot cover
2. Push the left edge in until it clicks securely into place.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
95
4.2.5 Installing/Removing the Optional Service Cards
To remove a slot cover
1. Remove the top cover.
Refer to "Opening the Top Cover" in "4.2.3 Opening/Closing the Top Cover".
2. From the inside, push the tab of the slot cover to the right and push out the left edge of the slot cover.
Tab
96
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory Card
4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory Card
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
•
Before touching the product (PBX, cards, etc.), discharge static electricity by touching ground or
wearing a grounding strap. Failure to do so may cause the PBX to malfunction due to static electricity.
When installing or removing the SD Memory Card, the power switch must be turned off.
When installing or removing the SD Memory Card, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
board. Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
The SD Memory Card contains software and the customer data. Therefore, do not allow unauthorized
access to prevent data leakage.
To prevent data leakage, render the SD Memory Card physically unusable before disposal.
Notice
•
•
Use only a Panasonic optional SD Memory Card.
The SD Memory Card must be inserted in the SD Memory Card slot of the mother board before startup.
Note
•
The maximum length of file names for files that are to be stored in the SD Memory Card is 60 characters.
Installing the SD Memory Card
1. Insert the SD Memory Card into the slot on the mother board.
Before Removing the SD Memory Card
When you want to back up Unified Messaging system data, a separate backup procedure is required.
For details about backing up Unified Messaging data, refer to "6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup" in the PC
Programming Manual.
Upgrading from the Installed SD Memory Card
To increase Voice Mail recording time, you can install a larger sized optional SD Memory Card.
For details about optional SD Memory Cards, refer to "4.3.2 SD Memory Cards".
System Prompts
Optional SD Memory Cards contain system prompts for Unified Messaging. However, system prompts
language data stored in the SD Memory Card differ from those found in the optional SD Memory Cards.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
97
4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory Card
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
98
For information about the system prompt languages in each SD Memory Card, refer to "9.1 System Prompt
Languages".
The system prompt language data you are using on the installed SD Memory Card must be backed up if
you want to continue using that SD Memory Card’s system prompt language data. After backing up the
system prompt language data, install the optional SD Memory Card, and then restore the backed up system
prompt language data to the new SD Memory Card.
This procedure is described below.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX.
(For details, refer to "Using a USB memory device" in "4.10 Connection of Peripherals".)
Back up the desired system prompts to the USB memory device.
(For details, refer to "6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup" in the PC Programming Manual.)
Shut down the PBX, and then turn the power switch off.
(For details about shutting down the PBX, refer to "5.4 System Control—System Shutdown" in the PC
Programming Manual.)
Remove the SD Memory Card, and then install an optional SD Memory Card.
(For details, refer to "4.3.2 SD Memory Cards".)
Start the PBX as described in "System Initialization Procedure" in "4.13 Starting the PBX".
Perform Easy Setup Wizard.
(For details, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard".)
Restore the system prompts backed up in step 2. For details, refer to "6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore" in the
PC Programming Manual.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory Card
Removing the SD Memory Card
1. Remove the SD Memory Card installed in the slot on the mother board.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
99
4.2.7 Types of Connectors
4.2.7 Types of Connectors
Connector Type
Pin Number
Used for
•
RJ45
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mother board (KX-NS700)
LAN Port
PFT I/F Port
DPT I/F Port
SLT I/F Port
EXP-M port
EXP-S port
LCOT6 (KX-NS5180)
PRI23 (KX-NS5290)
DPH2 (KX-NS5162)
DHLC4 (KX-NS5170)
DLC8 (KX-NS5171)
DLC16 (KX-NS5172)
MCSLC8 (KX-NS5173)
MCSLC16 (KX-NS5174)
•
EPG/MOH
–
–
–
–
1
8
(Twisted pair cable)
Mini Plug
2
4
Note
•
100
Pin assignments for RJ45 connectors differ depending on the card. Refer to the "Pin Assignments"
section of each card in "Section 4 Installation".
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.8 19-inch Rack Mounting
4.2.8 19-inch Rack Mounting
WARNING
•
Be careful not to drop any components. Dropping components may damage them or cause an
injury.
When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, only use the 19-inch rack mounting equipment
(attachment bracket, screws) included with the PBX.
•
CAUTION
•
When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, make sure that the installation of the unit does not cause
the temperature of the rack to exceed its limit.
When the PBX is mounted on a 19-inch rack, do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at
least 10 cm (4 in) around the PBX’s fan.
If the PBX is not installed properly using the securing correct methods, the PBX may fall causing serious
damage.
When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the rack.
•
•
•
Notice
When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, confirm that the rated current listed on the PBX’s name plate
does not exceed the threshold current for the breaker.
1. Fix the attachment brackets to the left and right sides of the PBX with 3 screws on each side.
(Recommended torque: 0.8 N·m [8.2 kgf·cm/7.12 lbf·in] to 1.0 N·m [10.2 kgf·cm/8.85 lbf·in])® 1
2. Place the PBX in the 19-inch rack and fix both attachment brackets to the rack with the rack’s proprietary
mounting equipment. ® 2
Attachment Bracket
2
1
Screw
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
101
4.2.9 Placing the PBX on a Desktop
4.2.9 Placing the PBX on a Desktop
When placing the PBX on a desktop, make sure to follow these instructions.
WARNING
Be careful not to drop any components. Dropping components may damage them or cause an
injury.
CAUTION
•
•
•
When the PBX is placed on a desktop, make sure that the PBX is placed as indicated in the diagram
below. Do not place it on its side or upside down.
Do not block the openings of the PBX. Allow space of at least 20 cm (8 in) above and 10 cm (4 in) at
the sides of the PBX.
Make sure that the surface behind the PBX is not made of wood.
Desk or Table
102
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.10 Surge Protector Installation
4.2.10 Surge Protector Installation
CAUTION
Performing surge protection is essential. Make sure to follow the instructions in this section.
Overview
A massive electrical surge can be caused if lightning strikes a telephone cable 10 m (33 ft) above ground, or
if a telephone line comes into contact with a power line. A surge protector is a device that is connected to a
CO line to prevent potentially dangerous electrical surges from entering the building via the CO line and
damaging the PBX and connected equipment.
To protect the system from electrical surges, we strongly recommend connecting the system to a surge
protector that meets the following specifications:
– Surge arrestor type: 3-electrode arrestor
– DC spark-over voltage: 230 V
– Maximum peak current: at least 10 kA
Additionally, proper grounding is very important for the protection of the system (refer to "4.2.4 Frame Ground
Connection").
Many countries/areas have regulations requiring surge protection. Be sure to comply with all applicable laws,
regulations, and guidelines.
Installation
CO Line
CO Line
CO Line
Surge
Protector
Terminal
Board
Extn.
PBX
Extn.
SLT
Ground
Document Version 2016-03
Frame
Ground
Extn.: Extension line
Installation Manual
103
4.2.10 Surge Protector Installation
Outside Installation
(Main Building)
Surge Protector
CO Line
(Another Building)
CO Line
Terminal
Board
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
PBX
SLT
Surge
Protector
Extn.
SLT
Ground
Extn.: Extension Line
If you install an extension outside of the building, the following precautions are recommended:
a. Install the extension wire underground.
b. Use a conduit to protect the wire.
Note
The surge protector for an extension is different from that for CO lines.
Installation of a Ground Rod
Surge Protector
CO Line
Grounding
Wire
PBX
(Underground)
Ground Rod
104
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.2.10 Surge Protector Installation
1. Connect the ground rod to the surge protector using a grounding wire with a cross-sectional area of at least
1.3 mm2.
2. Bury the ground rod near the protector. The grounding wire should be as short as possible.
3. The grounding wire should run straight to the ground rod. Do not run the wire around other objects.
4. Bury the ground rod at least 50 cm (20 in) underground.
Note
•
•
The above figures are recommendations only.
The length of ground rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
105
4.3.1 Mother Board
4.3 The Mother Board and Expansion Cards
4.3.1 Mother Board
4.3.1.1 Mother Board in the Main Unit
Function
The mother board is the preinstalled processing board with activation keys for CA Basic-Express for unlimited
users, use of 4 IP-PT, and 2 Unified Messaging ports. The Virtual Cards (CO line/extension) can be installed
in Virtual Slots of the mother board and can be activated with the activation keys. Also, the mother board
supports LAN connection so that IP telephones (IP-PTs, IP softphones, SIP phones) and PCs can be
connected on a private IP network.
Mountable Cards
• DSP Card (refer to "4.3.3 DSP Cards")
• SD Memory Card (refer to "4.3.2 SD Memory Cards")
• Remote Card (refer to "4.3.8 RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196)")
EXP-M Card Slot
DSP Card Slot
LAN Port
RMT Card Slot
LED
SD Card Slot
System Mode Switch
LEDs
To LAN
Note
•
•
•
106
The maximum length of the CAT 5/CAT 5e cables to be connected to the mother board is 100 m (328
ft).
For installing and removing the SD Memory Card, refer to "4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory
Card".
For details about Virtual Slots, refer to "2.3.3 System Capacity".
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.3.1 Mother Board
•
•
•
•
If the preinstalled activation keys on the mother board are not enough for the desired configuration,
you need to purchase activation key codes. For details about the activation keys, refer to
"3.1 Information about the Activation Keys".
For details about connecting to a LAN, refer to "4.11 LAN Connection".
For details about connecting peripherals, refer to "4.10 Connection of Peripherals".
For details about System Mode Switch, refer to "4.13 Starting the PBX".
WARNING
A lithium battery is used in the mother board. There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced
with the incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Pin Assignments
LAN Port (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
1
8
No.
Signal Name
Input (I)/Output (O)
Function
1
TPO+
O
Transmit data+
2
TPO-
O
Transmit data-
3
TPI+
I
Receive data+
4-5
Reserved
–
–
6
TPI-
I
Receive data-
7-8
Reserved
–
–
LED Indications
Indication
Color
Description
STATUS
Green
PBX status indication
• OFF: Power Off
• ON: Power On and running
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Starting up/
Logging in
• Flashing (120 times per minute): PFMPR is
updating
Amber
PBX status indication
• ON: Ready to shutdown
• Flashing (60 times per minute): Shutting down
Red
PBX status indication
• ON: Alarm
The cause may be one of the following:
– Power was cut without performing the
shutdown procedure.
– No IP address(es) assigned for the DSP
card(s) by the DHCP server.
– Alarm for an optional service card.
• Flashing (240 times per minute): Initialize failed
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
107
4.3.1 Mother Board
Indication
Color
Description
PBX MODE
Off
•
Amber/Red
•
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX
108
Installation Manual
LAN
LINK
Green
Not Used (Standalone)
One-look network registration status (Slave unit
on a One-look network)
When this PBX is added as a Slave unit to a
One-look network, the PBX MODE LED shows the
registration status in the same way as the
MASTER LED of a KX-NS1000. For details, refer to
the Installation Manual of the KX-NS1000.
Link status indication
OFF: Off-line
ON: Linked normally
Flashing: In communication
•
•
•
Document Version 2016-03
4.3.1 Mother Board
4.3.1.2 Mother Board in an Expansion Unit
Function
The mother board of an Expansion Unit is a pre-installed processing board with the EXP-S card.
EXP-S Card
EXP-S Port
LED
To EXP-M
LED Indication
Indication
STATUS
Color
Description
Off
Power Off
Green On
On Line
Green flashing (60 times per minute)
Starting Up
Green flashing (120 times per minute)
EXP-S card Program error
Red On
On Line with Alarm
Red flashing (60 times per minute)
OUS (Out of service)
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
109
4.3.2 SD Memory Cards
4.3.2 SD Memory Cards
Function
SD Memory XS, S, M
Card:
If you install one of the SD Memory card, you can expand the number
of SMDR data.
SMDR data:
1000 (default), 40000 (with SD memory card)
Store ACD report data:
300,000
SD Memory XS:
SD Memory with maximum of 40 hours Voice Mail recording time.
SD Memory S:
SD Memory with maximum of 200 hours Voice Mail recording time.
SD Memory M:
SD Memory with maximum of 400 hours Voice Mail recording time.
SD Card Slot
SD Card
Mother Board
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): none
User-supplied (not included): none
Note
For installing and removing the SD Memory Card, refer to "4.2.6 Installing/Removing the SD Memory
Card".
110
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.3.3 DSP Cards
4.3.3 DSP Cards
Function
A DSP card is a digital signal processor card with DSP resources that can be used for VoIP calls, conferences,
the Unified Messaging feature, and the DISA/OGM feature. The DSP cards are compliant with ITU-T G.
729A and G.711 codec methods.
To operate the IP CO line and/or IP extension, one of the DSP S, DSP M or DSP L card must be installed.
Screws
DSP Card
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Screws ´ 2
User-supplied (not included): none
CAUTION
When installing or removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
board. Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
Note
The DSP Resource Advisor can be used to calculate DSP resource usage easily. For details, refer to
"9.33.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource Advisor"
in the PC Programming Manual.
DSP Resource Information
The number of resources provided by each type of DSP card is as follows:
DSP Card Type
Number of Resources
DSP S
63
DSP M
127
DSP L
254
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
111
4.3.3 DSP Cards
IP Address Information
Either 1 or 2 IP addresses must be assigned to each DSP card, depending on the type of DSP card. You can
assign IP addresses to the DSP cards during Easy Setup Wizard or through system programming.
For details about Easy Setup Wizard, refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard".
For details about assigning IP addresses through System Programming, refer to "Changing IP Address
Settings".
DSP Card Type
112
Number of IP Addresses
DSP S/DSP M
1
DSP L
2
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.3.4 DLC2 in the Main Unit (installed by default)
4.3.4 DLC2 in the Main Unit (installed by default)
Function
•
2 digital extension ports for DPTs and PT-interface CSs.
To Extension
Pin Assignments
For DLC port
1
8
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
D1 A
Data port 1 (Low)
2
D2 A
Data port 1 (High)
3
D1 B
Data port 2 (Low)
4
Reserved
–
5
Reserved
–
6
D2 B
Data port 2 (High)
7
Reserved
–
8
Reserved
–
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
113
4.3.5 MCSLC4 in the Main Unit (installed by default)
4.3.5 MCSLC4 in the Main Unit (installed by default)
Function
•
4 extension ports for SLT with Caller ID (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control, and 2 power failure transfer
(PFT) ports. Maximum power output of 90 V for Message Waiting Lamp control.
To Extension
Note
•
For details about power failure transfer, refer to "4.12 Power Failure Connections".
Pin Assignments
For MCSLC4 port 1-2 and port 3-4
1
114
8
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
TA
Tip port 1
2
RA
Ring port 1
3
Reserved
–
4
Reserved
–
5
Reserved
–
6
Reserved
–
7
TB
Tip port 2
8
RB
Ring port 2
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.3.6 PFT in the Main Unit (installed by default)
4.3.6 PFT in the Main Unit (installed by default)
Function
When the power supply to the Main Unit fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from the current
connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "15.1.9 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature Manual
for further information.
For information about using this card, refer to "4.12 Power Failure Connections".
Pin Assignments
For PFT port
1
8
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
TA
Tip port 1
2
RA
Ring port 1
3
Reserved
–
4
Reserved
–
5
Reserved
–
6
Reserved
–
7
TB
Tip port 2
8
RB
Ring port 2
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
115
4.3.6 PFT in the Main Unit (installed by default)
To SLT1, SLT2
Optional card KX-NS5180
No. Signal Name
1
8
1
TA
2
RA
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
CO1 Tip
6
Reserved
CO1 Ring
7
TB
8
RB
PFT1-2
CO2 Tip
No. Signal Name
1
116
8
Installation Manual
1
TA
2
RA
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
TB
8
RB
CO2 Ring
Document Version 2016-03
4.3.7 EXP-S in an Expansion Unit (installed by default)
4.3.7 EXP-S in an Expansion Unit (installed by default)
Function
•
•
EXP-S is pre-installed in the SPR card of KX-NS720 to use the unit as an Expansion Unit.
By using this card, you can expand the Usage of Legacy CO Lines and extensions.
To EXP-M Card
Pin Assignments
For EXP-S port
1
8
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
UHW+
Receive data+
2
UHW-
Receive data-
3
REFCLK+
Reference CLK+
4
FHCLK+
Frame and System CLK+
5
FHCLK-
Frame and System CLK-
6
REFCLK-
Reference CLK-
7
DHW+
Transmit data+
8
DHW-
Transmit data-
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
117
4.3.8 RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196)
4.3.8 RMT Card in the Main Unit (KX-TDA0196)
Function
Analog modem card for remote communication with the PBX. IUT-T V.90 support. To be mounted on the mother
board of the Main Unit.
Screw
Screw
RMT Card
RMT Card Slot
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Screw x 2
118
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.4 Virtual Cards
4.4 Virtual Cards
Function
Virtual Cards are programs included with the mother board and that are treated as virtual cards by Web
Maintenance Console for convenience. Those programs can be activated with the appropriate activation key
(apart from V-IPCS4 cards, which do not require activation keys). By installing Virtual Cards in the Virtual Slots
of the mother board using Web Maintenance Console, IP CO lines, IP extensions, and IP-CSs can be used
via the mother board.
Virtual Card
Description
Virtual 16-Channel SIP CO Line Card
(V-SIPGW16)
Virtual Card for 16-channel SIP CO line. Compliant with RFC
3261, 3262, 3264, 3311, 3581, 3960 and 4028 protocols, and
ITU-T G.729A and G.711 codec methods. Also supports T.38
protocol.
Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway
Card (V-IPGW16)
Virtual Card for 16-channel H.323 CO line. Compliant with VoIP
H.323 V.5 protocol, and ITU-T G.729A and G.711 codec
methods. Also supports T.38 protocol.
Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension
Card (V-IPEXT32)
Virtual Card for 32 IP-PTs (KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500
series, and KX-NT265 [software version 2.00 or later only]).
Compliant with Panasonic proprietary protocol, and ITU-T G.
729A, G.711 and G.722 codec methods.
Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension
Card (V-SIPEXT32)
Virtual Card for 32 third party SIP phones/P-SIP Extensions.
Compliant with RFC 3261, 3264, 3310, 2327 and 4028
protocols, and ITU-T G.729A, G.711 and G.722 codec
methods. Also supports T.38 Protocol.
Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card
(V-IPCS4)
Virtual Card for 4 IP-CSs. Compliant with ITU-T G.729A and
G.711 codec methods.
Virtual UT Extension Card
(V-UTEXT32)
Virtual Card for 32 KX-UT series SIP phones. Compliant with
RFC 2327, 3261, 3264, 3310, 3515, 4028 and 4235 protocols,
and ITU-T G.729A, G.711 and G.722 codec methods. Also
supports WSD, CWMP and HTTP.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
119
4.4 Virtual Cards
Example: Virtual Cards in the Virtual Slots of the PBX
V-SIPEXT32
V-SIPGW16
V-IPEXT32
V-IPGW16
V-UTEXT32
V-IPCS4
Virtual Slots
Mother Board
120
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.5.1 LCOT6 Card (KX-NS5180)
4.5 Physical CO Line and Extension Cards
4.5.1 LCOT6 Card (KX-NS5180)
Function
6 analog CO line ports with Caller ID (FSK/FSK with Call Waiting Caller ID [Visual Caller ID]/DTMF).
RJ45
To CO line
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Copper wire
CAUTION
•
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No.26 AWG or larger (e.g., 24 AWG) UL Listed or CSA Certified
Telecommunication Line Cord.
Note
•
•
For details about power failure transfer, refer to "4.12 Power Failure Connections".
To confirm the CO line connection, refer to "Confirming the CO Line Connection" in "4.13 Starting the
PBX".
Pin Assignments
1
8
Document Version 2016-03
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
TA
Tip port 1
2
RA
Ring port 1
3
Reserved
–
4
Reserved
–
5
Reserved
–
6
Reserved
–
7
TB
Tip port 2
8
RB
Ring port 2
Installation Manual
121
4.5.2 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)
4.5.2 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)
Function
1-port ISDN Primary Rate Interface card (23B channels). NI (North American standard ISDN protocol)
compliant.
RJ45
To NT1
LED
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Twisted pair cable
CAUTION
•
•
When connecting this optional service card to the CO line, connect through an NT1; do not connect to
the U interface of the CO line directly.
PRI ports are SELV ports and should only be connected to SELV services.
Notice
•
The cable to connect to the ISDN Primary Rate Interface port of the PRI23 card should be CAT 5
(Category 5) or higher.
Note
•
To confirm the CO line connection, refer to "Confirming the CO Line Connection" in "4.13 Starting the
PBX".
Pin Assignments
1
122
8
Installation Manual
No.
Signal Name
Level [V]
Function
1
RX+
(+)
Receive data (+)
2
RX-
(-)
Receive data (-)
3
Reserved
–
–
4
TX-
(-)
Transmit data (-)
5
TX+
(+)
Transmit data (+)
6-8
Reserved
–
–
Document Version 2016-03
4.5.2 PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)
LED Indications
*1
Indication
Color
Description
STATUS
Green
Off : All Ports OUS or Fault
On: INS (In Service)
Flashing (60 times per minute)*1: Master Clock (On)
This can be set to indicate "Normal (a port is in use)" through system settings. For details, consult your dealer.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
123
4.5.3 DHLC4 Card (KX-NS5170)
4.5.3 DHLC4 Card (KX-NS5170)
Function
4-port digital hybrid extension card with Caller ID (FSK) for DPTs, APTs, SLTs, DSS consoles, and PT-interface
CSs.
Note
When using a DHLC4 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
RJ45
To Extension
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Twisted pair cable
Pin Assignments
1
124
8
Installation Manual
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
D1A
Data port 1 (low)
2
D2A
Data port 1 (High)
3
D1B
Data port 2 (low)
4
TB
Tip port 2
5
RB
Ring port 2
6
D2B
Data port 2 (High)
7
TA
Tip port 1
8
RA
Ring port 1
Document Version 2016-03
4.5.4 DLC8 Card (KX-NS5171)
4.5.4 DLC8 Card (KX-NS5171)
Function
8-port digital extension card for DPTs and PT-interface CSs.
Note
When using a DLC8 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
RJ45
To Extension
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 4, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Twisted pair cable
Pin Assignments
1
8
Document Version 2016-03
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
D1A
Data port 1 (Low)
2
D2A
Data port 1 (High)
3
D1B
Data port 2 (Low)
4
D1C
Data port 3 (Low)
5
D2C
Data port 3 (High)
6
D2B
Data port 2 (High)
7
D1D
Data port 4 (Low)
8
D2D
Data port 4 (High)
Installation Manual
125
4.5.5 DLC16 Card (KX-NS5172)
4.5.5 DLC16 Card (KX-NS5172)
Function
16-port digital extension card for DPTs and PT-interface CSs.
Note
When using a DLC16 card, the LPR software version must be 2.0 or later.
RJ45
To Extension
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 4, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Twisted pair cable
Pin Assignments
1
126
8
Installation Manual
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
D1A
Data port 1 (Low)
2
D2A
Data port 1 (High)
3
D1B
Data port 2 (Low)
4
D1C
Data port 3 (Low)
5
D2C
Data port 3 (High)
6
D2B
Data port 2 (High)
7
D1D
Data port 4 (Low)
8
D2D
Data port 4 (High)
Document Version 2016-03
4.5.6 MCSLC8 Card (KX-NS5173)
4.5.6 MCSLC8 Card (KX-NS5173)
Function
8-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
RJ45
To Extension
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Copper wire
Pin Assignments
1
8
Document Version 2016-03
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
TA
Tip port 1
2
RA
Ring port 1
3
TB
Tip port 2
4
TC
Tip port 3
5
RC
Ring port 3
6
RB
Ring port 2
7
TD
Tip port 4
8
RD
Ring port 4
Installation Manual
127
4.5.7 MCSLC16 Card (KX-NS5174)
4.5.7 MCSLC16 Card (KX-NS5174)
Function
16-port extension card for SLTs with Caller ID (FSK), Message Waiting Lamp control.
RJ45
To Extension
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): RJ45 connector, Copper wire
Pin Assignments
1
128
8
Installation Manual
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
TA
Tip port 1
2
RA
Ring port 1
3
TB
Tip port 2
4
TC
Tip port 3
5
RC
Ring port 3
6
RB
Ring port 2
7
TD
Tip port 4
8
RD
Ring port 4
Document Version 2016-03
4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS7130)
4.6 Expansion Card
4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS7130)
Function
A stacking card to be installed in the Main Unit. Up to 3 expansion units can be connected.
Note
KX-NS700 requires an activation key Expansion Capacity for KX-NS700 (KX-NSF991) to stack Expansion
Unit KX-NS720. A stacking cable is included with the KX-NS720. Use the dedicated cable supplied with
the Expansion Unit, to connect the EXP-M card.
A
B
C
To EXP-S Card
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Accessories Items
Accessories (included): Screws ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
CAUTION
When installing or removing this card, the power switch must be turned off.
Note
Status LED on Expansion Units indicates the connection status between EXP-M in the Main Unit and
EXP-S in Expansion Units. For more detail, refer to "LED Indications" in "4.3.1 Mother Board".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
129
4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS7130)
Pin Assignments
1
8
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
UHW+
Receive data +
2
UHW-
Receive data -
3
REFCLK+
Reference CLK +
4
FHCLK+
Frame and System CLK +
5
FHCLK-
Frame and System CLK -
6
REFCLK-
Reference CLK -
7
DHW+
Transmit data +
8
DHW-
Transmit data -
Maximum Cabling Length of Extension Connection
The maximum length of the extension cable that connects the Main Unit to the Expansion Unit is shown below:
Under 3 m (9 ft 10 in)
130
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)
4.7 The Doorphone Card
4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)
Function
A doorphone card for 2 doorphone, 2 door opener, and 2 external sensor.
A Doorphone Card is installed in CO Line slot.
To doorphone/
external sensor
To door opener
Accessories and User-supplied Items
Accessories (included): Spacer ´ 3, slot cover ´ 1
User-supplied (not included): Copper wire
Note
For details about connecting to a doorphone and/or door opener, refer to "4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone,
Door Opener, and/or External Sensor".
PIN Assignment
PIN Assignment for Doorphone Port
1
8
Document Version 2016-03
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
DP1
Doorphone 1 transmit
2
COM1
Doorphone 1 receive
3
SENS1a
Sensor 1
4
DP2
Doorphone 2 transmit
5
COM2
Doorphone 2 receive
6
SENS1b
Sensor 1 common
7
SENS2a
Sensor 2
8
SENS2b
Sensor 2 common
Installation Manual
131
4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)
PIN Assignment for Door opener Port
1
8
No.
Signal Name
Function
1
OP1a
Door opener 1 (Relay 1)
2
OP1b
Door opener 1 com (Relay 1 com)
3
Reserved
-
4
Reserved
-
5
Reserved
-
6
Reserved
-
7
OP2a
Door opener 2 (Relay 2)
8
OP2b
Door opener 2 com (Relay 2 com)
External Sensor
Power to the external sensor is provided from the DPH2 card and must be grounded through the DPH2 card
as indicated in the diagram below. A pair of "sensor" and "common" lines are connected to the DPH2 card for
each external sensor. The PBX detects input from the sensor when the signal is under 100 W.
Connection Diagram
PBX
DOORPHONE
+3.3V
10K
I/O
4.7K
External Sensor
+3.3V
33
sensor
33
common
4.7K
Door Opener
Current Limit: 24 V DC/30 V AC, 1 A maximum
132
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)
4.8 Connection of Extensions
4.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring
(Twisted Cable)
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
222 m (728 ft)
347 m (1138 ft)
500 m (1640 ft)
347 m (1138 ft)
PT-interface CS
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
500 m (1640 ft)
720 m (2362 ft)
830 m (2723 ft)
720 m (2362 ft)
DPT
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
140 m (459 ft)
229 m (751 ft)
360 m (1181 ft)
229 m (751 ft)
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
698 m (2289 ft)
1128 m (3700 ft)
1798 m (5897 ft)
1128 m (3700 ft)
APT and DSS Console
SLT
Notice
The maximum cabling distance may vary depending on the conditions.
DHLC4 Card
PT-interface
CS
DPT
APT
DSS
Console
SLT
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
MCSLC8, MCSLC16
cards
DLC2, DLC8, DLC16
cards
ü
ü
ü
ü
"ü" indicates that the extension card supports the terminal.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
133
4.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
4.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
Any SLT can be connected in parallel with an APT or a DPT as follows.
Note
In addition to an SLT, an answering machine, a fax machine or a modem (PC) can be connected in parallel
with an APT or a DPT.
With APT
For parallel connection, eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode must be disabled for that port through system
programming. Refer to "15.1.2 Paralleled Telephone" and "6.1.11 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature
Manual for further information.
To DHLC4 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R", "D1",
and "D2".
APT
SLT
With DPT
Parallel mode or eXtra Device Port (XDP) mode can be selected through system programming.
If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to
"15.1.2 Paralleled Telephone" and "6.1.11 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Manual for further
information.
134
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
Using a Modular T-Adaptor
To DHLC4 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".
DPT
SLT
Using an EXtra Device Port
Example: With KX-DT300 Series DPT*1
To DHLC4 card
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".
DPT
SLT
TO MAIN UNIT TO TEL
/ PABX
To DHLC4 card
To SLT
*1
Available for KX-DT300 Series DPT (except KX-DT321), KX-T7600 Series DPT (except KX-T7665) and KX-DT500 Series DPT
(except KX-DT521).
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
135
4.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
4.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
A DPT can be connected to another DPT on the Digital XDP connection. In addition, if the DPT is connected
to a DHLC4 card, it can also have an SLT connected in Parallel mode or XDP mode.
Note
•
•
•
•
Both DPTs must be KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600 series DPTs (except KX-T7640). Note that the
KX-T7667 can only be connected as a slave DPT.
Bluetooth® Modules or USB Modules must not be connected to DPTs in the Digital XDP connection.
Parallel mode or XDP mode can be selected through system programming.
If XDP mode is enabled through system programming, parallel connection is not possible. Refer to
"15.1.2 Paralleled Telephone" and "6.1.11 Extension Port Configuration" in the Feature Manual for
further information.
Example: With KX-DT300 Series DPT
Using a Modular T-Adaptor
To DLC2/DLC8/
DLC16 card
Modular
T-Adaptor
To DHLC4 card
(for connection of SLT)
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T" and "R".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "D1" and "D2".
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "D1" and
"D2".
SLT
Master DPT
Slave DPT
Back View of DPTs
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5:
TO TEL
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
30 m (98 ft)
50 m (164 ft)
60 m (196 ft)
50 m (164 ft)
Master DPT
Slave DPT
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
To DLC2/DLC8/DLC16 card
To DHLC4 card
(for connection of SLT)
136
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
Using an EXtra Device Port*1
To DLC2/DLC8/
DLC16 card
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R", 2-conductor wiring cord
"D1" and "D2".
Connect pins "T" and "R".
To DHLC4 card
(for connection of SLT)
4-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins "T", "R",
"D1" and "D2".
Master DPT
Slave DPT
SLT
Back View of DPTs
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5:
TO TEL
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
Maximum Distance
30 m (98 ft)
50 m (164 ft)
60 m (196 ft)
50 m (164 ft)
Master DPT
Slave DPT
TO MAIN UNIT
/ PABX
TO TEL
To DLC2/DLC8/DLC16 card To SLT
To DHLC4 card
(for connection of SLT)
*1
Connecting with a SLT is not available for KX-DT321, KX-T7665 and KX-DT521.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
137
4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/or External Sensor
4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/
or External Sensor
The Main Unit and Expansion Units each support 2 doorphones, 2 door openers and 2 sensors.
Note
Doorphones, door openers, and external sensors are user-supplied.
Maximum Cabling Distance
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5:
Maximum Distance
70 m (230 ft)
113 m (371 ft)
180 m (590 ft)
113 m (371 ft)
Doorphone
Door Opener
External Sensor
Installing the Doorphone (KX-T30865/KX-T7765/KX-T7775)
Note
•
•
The illustrations shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX-T30865.
For details about the installation of the KX-T7775, refer to the Operating Instructions of the
KX-T7775.
1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into 2 halves.
ic
ason
Pan
Screw
138
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.9 Connecting to a Doorphone, Door Opener, and/or External Sensor
Note for KX-T7765 Users
When loosening/tightening the screw, do not scratch the cabinet wall with the driver shaft.
Cabinet Wall
2. Pass the wires through the hole in the base cover, and attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.
Screw
To DPH2 Card
Note
Two kinds of screws are included with the doorphone. Please choose the appropriate kind for your wall
type.
: when a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall
: when you wish to install the doorphone directly onto the wall
3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the back cover.
To DPH2 Card
4. Re-attach the 2 halves and re-insert the screw.
Connection
Refer to "4.7.1 DPH2 Card (KX-NS5162)" for pin assignments.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
139
4.10 Connection of Peripherals
4.10 Connection of Peripherals
Maximum Distance
100 m (320 ft)
Maximum Distance
100 m (320 ft)
Switching Hub
PC
USB Memory
Device
BGM
Music on Hold
Maximum Distance
5 m (16 ft)
Cable
26 AWG:
24 AWG:
22 AWG:
CAT 5/CAT 5e:
Maximum Distance
10 m (32 ft)
10 m (32 ft)
10 m (32 ft)
10 m (32 ft)
USB Port
LAN Port
Cable
Maximum Distance
26 AWG:
10 m (32 ft)
24 AWG:
10 m (32 ft)
22 AWG:
10 m (32 ft)
CAT 5/CAT 5e: 10 m (32 ft)
Pager:
Amplifier/Speaker
BGM/MOH
The PBX provides Background Music and Music on Hold. Up to 2 external music sources (e.g., user-supplied
radio) can be connected to the PBX.
CAUTION
The MOH port is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device.
Notice
•
•
Wiring should be done carefully to prevent undue force being exerted on the plug. Otherwise, sound
may only be heard intermittently.
When the PBX and external music source are not connected to the same ground, hum noise may be
induced into Background Music and Music on Hold.
Pager
A paging device (user-supplied) can be connected to the PBX.
CAUTION
The Pager port is an SELV port and should only be connected to an approved SELV device.
140
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.10 Connection of Peripherals
USB Interface for USB Memory Device
The PBX is equipped with a USB 2.0 interface. This interface provides communication between the PBX and
user-supplied devices such as a USB memory device.
Using a USB memory device
A USB memory device can be used to backup and restore the system data of the PBX.
The PBX supports USB memory devices that meet the following specifications:
• File system: FAT
• Maximum capacity: 32 GB
• Maximum current: 500 mA
For details about backing up and restoring using a USB memory device, refer to "6.1 Tool—System Data
Backup" in the PC Programming Manual.
Note
Do not use a USB hub when connecting a USB memory device to the PBX.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
141
4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main Unit
4.11 LAN Connection
4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main Unit
Connecting the Main Unit to the LAN
The PBX is equipped with a LAN port for connecting to a LAN so that IP telephones (IP-PTs, IP softphones,
SIP phones), IP-CSs, PCs and a CTI Server can be connected on a private IP network. When the PBX is
connected to the LAN for the first time, you must assign IP addressing information to the PBX. See
"5.4 Programming the PBX" for instructions.
IP Softphone,
CA Client PC CTI Server
PC
LAN Port
Switching Hub
Ethernet Cable
IP-PT
IP-CS
SIP Phone
Connection for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Switching Hub
PBX (LAN Port)
Signal Name Pin No.
Pin No. Signal Name
TX+
1
1
RX+
TX-
2
2
RX-
RX+
3
3
TX+
RX-
6
6
TX-
Note
•
•
•
•
142
Use an Ethernet cable with an RJ45 connector for connection to a switching hub. The cable should be
a CAT 5 (Category 5) or higher for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, or CAT 5e (Enhanced Category 5).
Make sure that all CAT 5/CAT 5e cables in use are not over 100 m (328 ft) in length.
Make sure to set the port of the switching hub that connects to the card to operate under "Auto
Negotiation" mode.
Make sure to create a spanning tree for LAN connection in order to prevent loops from occurring in a
multi-bridged environment. Otherwise, some packets may circulate for long periods of time and
eventually PBX performance system may degrade.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main Unit
•
•
The CTI server can be used for connecting PCs on a LAN to provide third party call control CTI.
CTI connection uses the CSTA Phase 3 or TAPI 2.1 protocol. The operating system of the PC or CTI
server required for third party call control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer
to the manual for your CTI application software.
When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the PBX is connected to a layer 2 switch
that is IEEE 802.1Q compliant, and that is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of the switching
hub to which the PBX is connected must be set to "Untagged". Consult your network administrator for
details.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
143
4.11.2 LAN Connections for IP Telephones
4.11.2 LAN Connections for IP Telephones
When an IP telephone is connected to the LAN and power is supplied for the first time, you will be prompted
to set network parameters. The network parameters must be set for the IP telephone before it can be used.
Refer to "5.7 Assigning Networking Information to IP Telephones" for instructions.
Connecting an IP Telephone to a Switching Hub
When connecting an IP telephone to the LAN, connect it to a switching hub.
Note
•
Use an Ethernet straight cable with an RJ45 connector to connect the IP telephone to a switching hub.
The cable should be a CAT 5 (Category 5) or higher for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, or CAT 5e (Enhanced
Category 5).
• When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the switching hub to be connected is
IEEE 802.1Q compliant and is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of a switching hub that the
IP telephone is connected to must be set to "Trunk" port, to allow VLAN tagging. Consult your network
administrator for details.
• Since an IP softphone is installed and operates on a PC, the PC must be connected to the LAN to use
the IP softphone on the network.
The diagram below is for connecting an IP-PT to a switching hub. For SIP phones, refer to the documentation
of your SIP phone.
Example: KX-NT346
To a Switching Hub
Ethernet Straight Cable
144
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.11.2 LAN Connections for IP Telephones
Connecting an AC Adaptor to an IP Telephone
IP-PTs and some SIP phones comply with the IEEE 802.3af Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) standard. If PoE is
available on your network, these IP telephones can receive the necessary power supply from the network
through the network cable. In this case, no AC adaptor is needed for the IP telephones.
However, if PoE is not available, you will need to connect an AC adaptor to the IP telephone.
Note
Use only the specified type of AC adaptor for each IP telephone. For details, refer to the documentation of
your IP telephone.
Example: KX-NT346
To Wall Socket
AC Adaptor Cord
Connecting a PC to an IP Telephone
You can connect a PC to some IP telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series) using the IP telephone’s secondary
port. In this case, only a single port from the LAN’s network interface (switching hub) is required to connect
both the IP telephone and PC to the LAN.
Note
•
•
•
•
•
Use an Ethernet straight cable with an RJ45 connector to connect a PC to the IP telephone. The cable
should be a CAT 5 (Category 5) or higher for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, or CAT 5e (Enhanced Category
5).
Only a PC can be connected to the secondary port of an IP telephone. Other IP telephones, including
IP-PTs, or network devices such as routers or switching hubs, cannot be connected.
The secondary port does not support PoE for connected devices.
In cases where a PC is connected to the secondary port, if the IP telephone connection to the PBX is
disconnected or reset, LAN communication to the PC will also be disrupted.
Generally, it is recommended that you connect no more than one PC to the secondary port of each IP
telephone.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
145
4.11.2 LAN Connections for IP Telephones
Example: KX-NT346
To a PC
Ethernet Straight Cable
146
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
4.12 Power Failure Connections
4.12 Power Failure Connections
When the power supply to the PBX and/or Expansion Unit fails, power failure transfer (PFT) will switch from
the current connection to the Power Failure Connection. Refer to "15.1.9 Power Failure Transfer" in the Feature
Manual for further information.
The table below shows PFT support Cards and PFT support ports.
PFT support Cards
KX-NS700
PFT support ports
Optional card KX-NS5180
Port 1-2
Pre-installed MCSLC4
Port 1-2
Note
•
•
•
A CO line conversation established during power failure can be maintained even when the power
returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure
Connection.
KX-NS720 does not support PFT.
The maximum number of available PFT ports is always 2, regardless of the number of connected
Expansion Units.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
147
4.12 Power Failure Connections
Power Failure Connection
In the case of KX-NS700
In the event of a power failure, a specific SLT port is automatically supplied power through the PFT ports. The
PFT ports are port 1-2 (on the pre-installed MCSLC4) and port 1-2 (on the optional LCOT6 card).
To SLT1, SLT2
Optional card KX-NS5180
No. Signal Name
1
8
1
TA
2
RA
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
CO1 Tip
6
Reserved
CO1 Ring
7
TB
8
RB
PFT1-2
CO2 Tip
No. Signal Name
1
148
8
Installation Manual
1
TA
2
RA
3
Reserved
4
Reserved
5
Reserved
6
Reserved
7
TB
8
RB
CO2 Ring
Document Version 2016-03
4.13 Starting the PBX
4.13 Starting the PBX
WARNING
Make sure that the AC outlet is properly grounded, then securely connect the 3-pin AC plug
including the grounded pin.
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
Use only the AC power cord included with the PBX.
Before touching the product (PBX, cards, etc.), discharge static electricity by touching ground or
wearing a grounding strap. Failure to do so may cause the PBX to malfunction due to static electricity.
Once you have started the PBX, if you unplug the PBX, do not initialize it again as described in "System
Initialization Procedure". Otherwise, your programmed data will be cleared. To restart the PBX, refer
to "7.1.5 Restarting the PBX".
The plug of power supply cordset is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is
located near the equipment and is easily accessible.
Installing the Hook Clip for the AC Power Cord
1. Insert the hook clip into the hook clip hole.
Note
Use only the hook clip included with the PBX.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
149
4.13 Starting the PBX
Connecting the AC Power Cord
1. Plug the AC power cord into the PBX and pass the cord through the hook clip as indicated. Push the hook
clip in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
Note
For safety reasons, do not stretch or pinch the AC power cord.
To UPS
2. When not using a UPS:
Plug the other end of the cord into an AC outlet.
When using a UPS:
Plug the other end of the cord into the outlet of the UPS.
System Initialization Procedure
1. Slide the System Mode Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
STATUS Indicator
150
Installation Manual
System Mode Switch
Document Version 2016-03
4.13 Starting the PBX
2. Turn on the power switch of the PBX. The STATUS indicator will flash green.
3. While the STATUS indicator is flashing green, slide the System Mode Switch back to the "NORMAL"
position. Depending on the configuration, initialization takes about 2.5 minutes. If successfully executed,
the STATUS indicator will stop flashing and remain lit up.
Note
When a DSP card is installed and a DHCP server is not connected, installed DSP card cannot acquire
an IP address, and the STATUS indicator will turn red.
All data, except for system prompts and activation key files, will be erased. Data that is erased includes Unified
Messaging data, call logs, etc. The settings for the PBX as well as all optional service cards will be initialized
to their default values.
Note
•
•
•
After the PBX is initialized, you can restore system data to the PBX that has been backed up earlier.
For details about backing up and restoring system data, refer to "6.1 Tool—System Data Backup",
"7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC" and "7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX" in
the PC Programming Manual.
After the PBX is initialized, you must set up the mandatory settings required for the PBX with Easy
Setup Wizard. For details refer to "Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" and "5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard".
When a UPS is connected, make sure it is started as instructed in the documentation for the UPS.
Confirming the CO Line Connection
After the PBX starts up, program the PBX and connect CO lines to the PBX.
To confirm that the CO lines are successfully connected, dial [ ] [3] [7] + CO line number (3 digits) on an IP
telephone, or press the IP/DPT/APT telephone’s S-CO button. You will hear a dial tone if the CO line is available
and connected.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
151
4.13 Starting the PBX
152
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 5
Programming Information
This section describes the installation procedure,
structure, and functions of the Web Maintenance
Console for programming IP telephones and the PBX.
Further information on programming the PBX for use
with SIP CO lines and a VoIP network is included.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
153
5.1 Overview of Web Maintenance Console
5.1 Overview of Web Maintenance Console
Web Maintenance Console is designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX.
You can program and control the PBX over an IP network using Web Maintenance Console.
This section describes programming basic items using Web Maintenance Console.
Web Maintenance Console Features
Login Status
Menu Buttons
Note
The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
154
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.2 PC Connection
5.2 PC Connection
The Main Unit has a LAN port for PC to program PBX. A default IP address is assigned to each port. A PC
can be connected through LAN connection.
Port
*1
Default IP Address
LAN Port
192.168.0.101
MNT Port*1
223.0.0.1
Default Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Use USB to LAN adaptor to use the USB port of the PBX as an MNT port.
Connection via LAN
LAN
LAN Port
PC
Switching Hub
Note
For details about connecting a switching hub to the PBX, refer to "4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main
Unit".
Connection via Virtual Private Network (VPN)
PC
Router
VPN
LAN
Router
LAN Port
Switching Hub
Notice
To access the PBX via VPN, the PC must be in the same VPN.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
155
5.2 PC Connection
Note
For details about connecting a switching hub to the PBX, refer to "4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main
Unit".
Connection via Internet
PC
Router
Internet
LAN
LAN Port
Router
Switching Hub
CAUTION
It is strongly recommended to use TLS encrypted communication when the PC is accessing the PBX via
the Internet. To use TLS encryption, routers must have a port set up for https communication.
Notice
To access the PBX via the internet, routers must have static NAT/NAPT settings (Port forwarding) enabled.
Note
For details about connecting a switching hub to the PBX, refer to "4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main
Unit".
Connection via RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)
PC
Analog MODEM
Analog Line
Network
RMT Card (KX-TDA0196) is Installed
in KX-NS700.
To connect a PC to the Main Unit
1. Start Off-line WebMC launcher.
2. Click the Connect-Online Mode(C) button.
3. Select Modem tab.
4. Set following.
– Dial Number
– Dial Type
– Port
156
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.2 PC Connection
– Baud Rate (bps)
– Flow Control
– Command
5. Enter Password.
6. Click Connect button.
Connection via PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290)
PC
ISDN MODEM
ISDN Line
Network
PRI23 Card (KX-NS5290) is installed
in KX-NS700
To connect a PC to the Main Unit
1. Start Off-line WebMC launcher.
2. Click the Connect-Online Mode(C) button.
3. Select the ISDN Remote tab.
4. In Telephone Number, enter a telephone number.
5. In Password, enter the password.
6. Click the Connect button.
MNT Port
By connecting a USB-LAN adaptor to the USB port you can access the PBX over a LAN.
Notice
•
•
When connecting the PC to the MNT port, if the PC is set to obtain the IP address automatically, the
IP address of the PC will be set to an appropriate IP address to establish a connection to the PBX.
Only recommended USB-LAN adaptors can be used. For information on recommended products,
consult you dealer.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
157
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
System Requirements
For the system requirements of the PC (operating system, hardware specifications, supported browsers etc.),
refer to "1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console" in the PC Programming Manual.
Copyright for MD5
This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5
Message-Digest Algorithm).
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived
from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the
derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or
the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty
of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
Password Security
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform
the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to
others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
program the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system
passwords, refer to "1.1.3 Entering Characters" in the PC Programming Manual.
Connecting to Web Maintenance Console
1. Connect the PC to the PBX:
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC in your LAN or VPN.
•
•
158
For details, refer to "Connection via LAN", "Connection via Virtual Private Network (VPN)" and
"4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main Unit".
Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC using an Internet
connection. For details, refer to "Connection via Internet" and "4.11.1 LAN Connection for the Main
Unit".
Connect the PBX to a PC through analog remote (RMT card) or ISDN remote. For detail, refer to
"15.1.4 PC Programming" in the Feature Manual.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
2. Access Web Maintenance Console:
LAN or VPN Connection:
Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console
port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection to the PBX.
The default IP address for the LAN port of the PBX is 192.168.0.101, and the default Web Maintenance
Console port number is 80. Accordingly, the address to enter to connect to the PBX for the first time will
be as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://192.168.0.101
Note
•
The default subnet mask for the LAN port is 255.255.255.0.
MNT Port Connection:
Launch your Web browser and in the address bar, enter one of the following addresses exactly as shown:
– 223.0.0.1
or
– http://kx-ns700.
Note
•
•
•
If entering "http://kx-ns700.", be sure to include the period at the end as shown.
The default subnet mask for the MNT port is 255.255.255.0.
If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC.
Internet Connection (TLS Connection):
When the PC is accessing the PBX from a connection over the internet, the use of TLS is strongly
recommended. When using a TLS encrypted connection, the default port is 443. The format of the address
to enter to connect to the PBX using a TLS encrypted connection will be as follows:
https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy
• "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of a device that can be accessed from the Internet, such as the
IP address of a network router.
• "yyy" is a port number. The network router’s port forwarding settings must be configured so that traffic
arriving at port "yyy" is forwarded to the correct IP address and port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Port forwarding settings must specify the IP address and the port number of the network router
("xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy") to transfer the packets to the PBX in the LAN, so that the packets sent to the
global IP address and specified port of the router will be transferred to the IP address and specified
port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Note the usage of "https" instead of "http".
• If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using TLS, a security alert window is displayed. Follow
the prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.
Note
The IP address and Web Maintenance Console port number for the PBX can be changed from their
default values. If settings for the LAN port’s IP address has been forgotten, refer to the PT Programming
[991] in PT Programming Manual.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. Log in with the Installer level account name and
the default Installer level account password to launch the Easy Setup Wizard. For details about the Easy
Setup Wizard, see "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
159
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
Using Web Maintenance Console in Off-line Mode
You can connect a PC to the PBX to program the PBX using Web Maintenance Console (On-line mode), or
you can program the PBX without connecting the PC to the PBX (Off-line mode).
Off-line mode programming is performed using the Off-line version of Web Maintenance Console, which you
install on your PC. The changes made during Off-line mode are saved as local data on the PC, and then later
uploaded to the PBX.
The following procedures outline how to install the Web Maintenance Console for Off-line mode programming.
Installation
Note
•
•
•
Be sure to install the latest version of KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console.
Before beginning the installation of Off-line Web Maintenance Console, the following software must be
installed on the PC:
– Microsoft® .NET Framework 2.0
– Microsoft .NET Framework 4
This software can be downloaded from Microsoft’s online Download Center.
To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista® Business, Windows® 7, Windows
8, Windows 8 Professional, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 Professional, you must be logged in as a user
in the "Administrators" group.
1. Copy the KX-NS Unified Web Maintenance Console setup file to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.
Note
For information about programming the PBX in Off-line mode, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
Converting KX-NCP series or KX-TDE series System Data for Use with the
KX-NS700
System data from a KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 or KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 can be converted for use with the
KX-NS700 to ensure a seamless transition to the new system.
In this section, we use "Maintenance Console" for the following Maintenance Console.
– Unified Maintenance Console for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200
1. Connect a PC to a KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200, and then start the Maintenance
Console.
For details about connecting a PC to a PBX or for details about the Maintenance Console, refer to the
appropriate documentation.
2. In the Maintenance Console, save the PBX's system data file DBSYS or DMSYS*1 to the PC.*2
For details about saving the system data file to the PC, refer to the appropriate documentation.
3. Start Web Maintenance Console for the KX-NS700 in Off-line mode.
4. In the Program Launcher, click Database Converter.
5. In Select Original File Name, select the system file (DBSYS or DMSYS*1) you saved in step 2 as the file
to convert.
6. Select WebMC Language and click Next.
7. An image of converting the file is displayed on the screen. The system data will be converted and a system
data file for the KX-NS700 (DHSYS) is created. It will complete within one minute.
8. After conversion is complete, you can click Save on the Result of Converting screen and save the results
file to your PC.
9. In the Select Next Step screen, you can select the action from the followings.
1. Finish of Database Conversion
2. Continue Online Programming (Connect - Online Mode)
160
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
3. Continue Offline Programming (Open - Offline Mode)
*1
The PBX's system data file
•
•
*2
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: DBSYS
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: DMSYS
The software version for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 or KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 must meet the latest version requirements shown in
the Data Converter tool. If the requirements are not met, you must use the Maintenance Console to upgrade the version to the latest
version, and then save the DBSYS or DMSYS file.
Notice
•
•
•
•
The following numbering plan settings are brought over during data conversion:
Feature Numbers, Other PBX Number, Extension Number, Quick Dial Number
PBX voice data (e.g., SVM, OGM) is not converted.
Data conversion for a SLC/LCOT card in the KX-NS700 is not supported; the number of ports in these
cards is too small.
The following data is not supported by the data conversion.
Unsupported Item
Default Setting
Time Mode
Current time mode
Time mode switching time (manual mode)
Location setting default
Not Stored
Wired/Wireless extensions
Timed Reminder
Not set
Station Lock
Unlocked
Remote Station Lock
Unlocked
Extension Call Charge Total
Total cleared
Not Ready/Ready (Wrap-up)
Wrap-up status cleared
LCS On/Off
Location setting default
Room Status (Check In/Check out/Not Ready/
Cleaned Up)
Location setting default
Auto Answer
Location setting default
Absent Message Status
Saved Number Redial
ICD Group Login Status (Login/Logout)
Message Waiting
Not set
Number cleared
Location setting default
Canceled
Incoming Log
Cleared
Outgoing Log
Cleared
TAM Log
Cleared
Personal Absent Message
Document Version 2016-03
Message cleared
Installation Manual
161
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
Unsupported Item
Default Setting
FWD/DND setting status (intercom/outside
calls)
Setting Canceled
Monitor PBX ID
Cleared
CO Line
Call Charge Total
Traffic Data
Total cleared
Cleared
Incoming Call Group
Message Waiting
Incoming Log
FWD/DND setting status (FWD/DND set or
not)
Traffic Data
Canceled
Cleared
Setting canceled
Cleared
Verification Code Information
Verification Code Password, Lock Status
Verification Code Password, Lock Counter
Call Charge Total
Unlocked
Counter cleared
Total cleared
Cabinet Information
Incoming Log
Cleared
Outgoing Log
Cleared
Line Error Log
Cleared
MPR-LPR Call Data Log
Cleared
System Information
Password, Lock Counter for Remote
Programming
Major/Minor Error
Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Counter cleared
Cleared
Canceled
Note
Review the settings of feature numbers of converted data.
Example: Idle Line Access (Local Access) settings
162
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
KX-TVA System Prompt and Mailbox Data Import
Voice data recorded by users in a KX-TVA series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the Unified
Messaging system of the PBX. System prompts, mailbox prompts, and mailbox messages can be converted.
Condition:
• The required software versions are as follows:
– KX-TVA series: version 1.0 or later
Notice
•
•
•
Only data recorded by users can be imported; the preinstalled guidance data will not be imported.
The language set for the KX-TVA series VPS must be set as the language for the Unified Message
system where the voice data will be imported. If the language is different, the data cannot be imported.
The following content of KX-TVA mailbox's audio data is not restored as the Unified Messaging system
Mailbox data.
– Receive message: Mailbox number of Recorder
– Transfer message: Mailbox number of Recorder/Sender
– Confirmation of hearing a message: Mailbox number of the responder
In this case, the message is treated as if it were recorded by a non-subscriber.
– Mailbox number of Recorder/Sender/Responder is not announced in restored audio data.
– When IMAP integration is used, “Unknown Caller” is shown in the “From” field.
1. Connect a PC to the KX-TVA series VPS, and then start the KX-TVA Maintenance Console.
For details about connecting a PC to the VPS or about the Maintenance Console, refer to the appropriate
documentation.
2. In Maintenance Console, back up the voice data on the KX-TVA series VPS to the PC.
For details about backing up KX-TVA VPS voice data, refer to the documentation of the corresponding
VPS.
3. Start the Main Unit, and then start Web Maintenance Console.
4. Navigate to Maintenance ® Tool ® 10. UM data restore, and then select the types of voice data you want
to restore (i.e., import). You can select the following types of data:
a. System prompts
• For batch restore
Under System Prompts, select the System Prompts check box.
Condition:
The Unified Messaging system has only 8 system prompts, which is less than the number on
KX-TVA VPSs. If you restore system prompts, Prompt 9 and Prompt 10 on the KX-TVA VPS will
not be restored. To import Prompt 9 and Prompt 10 to the Unified Messaging system, they must
be restored individually.
• For individual restore
You can select the voice data to restore one at a time as necessary.
– Installed Prompts – Prompt1 to 8
– Custom Service Menu
– Company Name
– Company Greeting
– System Mailbox Group Voice Label
– System Caller Name
– Prompt Selection
– Hold Announce Menu
b. Mailbox Prompts and Mailbox Messages
• For batch restore
Under Mailbox Prompts, select the Mailbox Prompts check box, and then select the Mailbox
Messages check box.
• For individual restore
You can select the voice data to restore one at a time as necessary.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
163
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Owner Name
Personal Greetings
Personal Caller ID Name
Interview
Personal Group List Name
EMD List Member Name
Mailbox Messages
5. Select a file from Local PC, USB Flash Drive (Main Unit), or NAS to restore, and the folder selection
menu becomes active. Specify the folder where the backup data is saved, and then click OK.
The selected voice data will be imported.
Note
•
When using a NAS, ensure that you have sufficient network bandwidth.
6. The import results will be saved in a file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt".
Notice
•
•
164
It is possible that passwords are set on KX-TVA and Unified Messaging mailboxes. If the passwords
for KX-TVA mailboxes are different from the Unified Messaging mailbox passwords, and data is being
restored (imported) individually, you will be prompted for the password of the Unified Messaging
mailbox. If password authentication fails 3 times, the voice data for that mailbox will not be imported.
If you are not prompted for mailbox passwords during the restore, the password set for the mailbox in
the Unified Messaging system will be used. If no passwords are set for Unified Messaging mailboxes
(excluding the manager mailboxes), the default password specified in the Unified Messaging system
will be applied. If the default password setting is disabled, the password "1111" will be applied. The
default mailbox password will not be applied to the manager mailboxes.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
KX-TDE100/200 series
Convert
System
Data
KX-TVA series
KX-NCP500/1000 series
Convert
VM Prompt
KX-TVA Maintenance Console
Maintenance Console
Get DBSYS or DMSYS
and save to PC.
Get VM prompt and save
to PC.
Database Converter
Start Database converter.
Select DBSYS or DMSYS
and start conversion.
Convert Execute
Off line Web-MC
Edit additional parameters
by Offline Web-MC.
Set User configurations.
Ex.) Setting UserProfile/
MBOX etc.
Web-MC
Connect to the Main Unit
and transfer DHSYS.
Reboot the Main Unit
Abbreviations
DxSYS: System File for PBX
Web-MC: Web Maintenance Console
VM: Voice Mail system
UM: Unified Message system
*1
Main Unit*1
Web-MC
UM Restore
KX-NS700
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
165
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
VPS System Data Import
System data from a KX-TVA series VPS can be imported into the PBX’s Unified Messaging system using the
Off-line Web Maintenance Console’s import feature.
Condition:
The required software versions are as follows:
– KX-TVA series: version 3.0 or later
– KX-NS700: version 4.0 or later
Note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following settings can be imported from a VPS:
– Mailbox settings
– Custom service settings
– Call routing settings
When importing mailbox settings, you must first create mailboxes in the Unified Messaging system with
the same numbers as those in the VPS. The settings of the matching mailbox numbers will then be
imported. However, you can select whether mailbox passwords will be imported.
For the settings of mailboxes that do not match a mailbox in the VPS’s settings, the Unified Messaging
system’s default values will be set.
If there are any errors when importing data from the VPS, such as differences in value ranges, importing
will be skipped for the affected mailbox and an error will be recorded in the report. Processing will then
continue with the next mailbox.
When importing custom service settings, the custom service settings for the Unified Messaging system
will first be set to their default values, and then the VPS’s custom service settings will be added. Be
aware that any existing custom service settings in the Unified Messaging system will be reset to their
default values.
The VPS’s custom services will be imported into the Unified Messaging system’s custom service seats
as follows:
VPS custom service number
PBX Unified Messaging system custom
service seat number
1–50
1
51–100
2
If the service type being imported from the VPS is "Menu & Transfer", and "Guidance #9" or "Guidance
#10" is specified for "Prompt Mode", importing will be canceled for that custom service and an error
will be recorded in the report. Processing will then continue with the next custom service.
The following call routing settings can be imported.
– Caller ID routing
– PIN routing
When importing call routing settings, the call routing settings for the Unified Messaging will first be set
to their default values, and then the VPS's call routing settings will be added. Be aware that any existing
call routing settings in the Unified Messaging system will be reset to their default values.
If there are any errors when importing call routing settings from the VPS, importing will be canceled for
the affected call routing settings, and an error will be recorded in the report. Processing will then
continue with the next call routing settings.
Settings for features in the VPS that the Unified Messaging system does not support are not imported.
To import system data from a VPS
1. Connect a PC to the VPS, and then start the VPS’s Maintenance Console.
For details about connecting a PC to the VPS or about the Maintenance Console, refer to the VPS’s
documentation.
166
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
2. In Maintenance Console, back up the system data on the VPS to the PC.
The file name of the backup will be similar to:
"SystemParameters50_20140423161816.bkp"
For details about backing up, refer to the documentation of the VPS.
3. Start the PBX’s Off-line Web Maintenance Console.
To import the VPS data into an existing PBX’s system data, save the PBX's system data beforehand. For
details, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
4. Log in using the Installer level account.
5. Navigate to Maintenance ® Tool ® Import ® VM System Data.
6. In Select a Destination UM-Group No., select the UM-group number.
7. In TVA database file , select the system data file name to import.
8. Select the data to import.
• Mailbox—Mailbox Parameters
• Mailbox—Mailbox Password
• Custom Service Settings
• Call Routing—Caller-ID Mode Settings
• Call Routing—PIN Mode Settings
9. Click OK.
The data will be imported into the PBX’s system data. The start and end time of the import as well as the
import results will be displayed on the report. You can save this to the local PC.
10. Save the PBX system data with the imported VPS system data to the PC so it can be transferred to a PBX.
For details about transferring the file to the PBX, refer to "7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX" in
the PC Programming Manual.
11. Restart the PBX to apply the new system data.
VPS
VPS Maintenance Console
Back up the system data to PC
PBX
Off-line Web Maintenance Console
Back up the system data to PC
Import VPS system data into
PBX system data
Transfer system data
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
167
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
5.4 Programming the PBX
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will set up the mandatory settings required for the PBX.
When you log in to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialized, factory default state, the Easy
Setup Wizard for that PBX will launch automatically. You must log in using the Installer level account name
and password.
– The Installer level account name is "INSTALLER".
– The default Installer level account password is "1234".
1. After Easy Setup Wizard launches, the Easy Setup Wizard screen appears:
a. In WebMC Language Setting, select a language from the drop-down list.
b. In PBX Type, select a PBX type.
Standalone:
This PBX will be used as a standalone system. The standalone PBX controls all terminals, CO lines,
and applications.
Slave:
This PBX will serve as a Slave unit in a One-look network. The Slave unit can share setup information
and resources controlled by the Master unit.
Note
When Slave is selected, the Location Setting and Password settings are not editable. Skip these
settings and go to One-look Network (step e).
c. In Location Setting, select a location from drop-down list.
d. In Password Setting, enter a password for the Installer level account. In Re-enter, enter the same
password.
Note
The installer password must be changed from its default setting.
e. When Slave is selected in step b, in One-look Network, specify whether to activate the 60-day
f.
One-look Networking Trial Activation Key.
– If Active is selected, the 60-day trial will begin when the Easy Setup Wizard is completed.
– If Non Active is selected, you will have to activate the trial manually in order to use One-look
Networking Features on a trial basis.
Click Start Setup Wizard.
Note
If the location is changed from its default value, a notice about restarting the PBX is displayed. Click
OK to restart the PBX. After the PBX restarts, start Web Maintenance Console again (refer to
"Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" in "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console"). When you
start the Easy Setup Wizard again, you will start from step 1, below.
2. In the Date & Time Settings:
a. Select a time zone from the drop-down list.
b. Click the Local Time box, and then select the date and time from the menu.
c. In Automatic Time Adjustment, enter information as necessary.
d. In Daylight Saving, select the appropriate option.
e. Click Next.
3. In the Numbering settings:
a. In Feature No, select the appropriate option.
b. In CO Access/Operator No, select the appropriate options.
168
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
c. Select one of the following options for Select default value of Numbering Plan:
– 3 digits Extension Number
– 4 digits Extension Number
d. Click Next.
Note
Depending on the value selected above, the numbering plan of the PBX will vary as follows. Select this
value with care.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
169
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
3 digits
Extension
Number
4 digits
Extension
Number
101–xxx
or
201–xxx
1001–xxxx
or
2001–xxxx
500
5000
501–564
5001–5064
Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
591
5091
Analog Remote Maintenance
599
5099
TAFAS (Pager)
600
6000
601–664
6001–6064
699
6099
592, 593
5092, 5093
Extension Number
Floating Extension Number
UM Group
DISA (1–64)
ICD Group (1–64)
ISDN Remote Maintenance
UM Channel (1–2)
4. In the Manager/Operator settings:
a. Select an extension number for the manager from the drop-down list.
b. Select an extension number for the operator from the drop-down list.
c. Click Next.
5. In the Trunk settings:
a. In CO Dialing Mode , select the appropriate option.
b. Select an option for Incoming Call Distribution Group. You can select "Yes" or "No". Refer to the
information on this screen for details.
c. Click Next.
6. In the LAN settings:
The IP addresses for the PBX, DNS server, and DSP card can be assigned automatically through a DHCP
server or entered manually.
When using a DHCP server:
a. Select Obtain an IP address automatically.
b. Select Obtain DNS server address automatically.
c. Select Obtain DSP IP address automatically.
Notice
The boxes will turn grey and the IP address information will be assigned automatically.
Write down the address information assigned to the PBX for future reference.
d. Click Next.
When not using a DHCP server:
a. Select Use the following IP address.
b. Enter an IP address*1, subnet mask*2, and default gateway*1. (You may not need to specify the default
gateway, depending on your network configuration.)
c. Select Use the following DNS server address.
d. Enter the preferred and alternative DNS IP addresses*1.
170
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
e. Select Use the following DSP IP address.
f. Enter up to 2 IP addresses*1 for each installed DSP card.
g. Click Next.
*1
*2
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.1" to "223.255.255.254"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
7. In the VoIP (Ext) settings:
In Number of IP Extensions:
a. In IP-PT(NT), specify the number of IP-PT extensions.
b. In UT/UDT, specify the number of UT extensions.
c. In SIP-Phone, specify the number of SIP extensions.
Note
You can confirm the required number of virtual IP extension cards, total IP extensions and total
virtual IP extension cards.
d. In IP Terminal Registration Mode, select one of the following options:
• Manual: Manually register IP terminal information.
• Full Automatic: Automatically register IP terminal information.
• Extension Number Input: Automatically register IP terminal information except the extension
number. The extension number can then be registered from the IP telephone manually.
Note
•
•
The Full Automatic and Extension Number Input registration modes may not be available for
certain types of IP terminals. In such cases, select Manual as the registration mode.
For more information about the IP terminal registration modes, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP
Telephones".
e. In DHCP Server, select either Disable or Enable.
f. If you select Enable in DHCP Server, enter valid settings for the automatic assignment of IP addresses.
g. Click Finish.
8. Follow the prompts of the Easy Setup Wizard. If LAN settings were changed from their default values in
step 6, you will be prompted to restart the PBX after the Easy Setup Wizard is complete. Click OK to restart
the PBX. The login screen will be displayed. Click Skip to finish the Easy Setup Wizard and continue the
configuration from the home screen without restarting the PBX.
Notice
If you select Skip, restart the PBX after completing the settings.
9. Log in with the Installer level account using the password entered during Easy Setup Wizard. The Home
Screen is displayed. You may now begin programming the PBX.
Notice
If an external DHCP server is in use, it must be able to use the "client identifier" option specified by
RFC 213.
Changing IP Address Settings
IP addressing information for the PBX can also be changed from Web Maintenance Console after the Easy
Setup Wizard has been completed.
1. Click Setup ® Network Service ® IP Address/Ports.
2. Click the Basic Settings tab.
3. When using a DHCP server:
a. Select Obtain an IP address automatically.
b. Select Obtain DNS server address automatically.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
171
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
c. Select Obtain DSP IP address automatically.
Notice
The boxes will turn grey and the IP address information will be assigned automatically.
Write down the address information assigned to the PBX for future reference.
When not using a DHCP server:
a. Select Use the following IP address.
b. Enter an IP address*1, Subnet Mask*2, and Default Gateway*1.
(The default gateway may not need to be specified depending on your network configuration.)
Select Use the following DNS server address.
Enter the preferred and alternative DNS IP addresses*1.
Select Use the following DSP IP address.
Enter up to 2 IP addresses*1 for each installed DSP card.
4. Click OK.
a. A screen will appear stating that any changes made in step 3 will be activated after the PBX is restarted.
b. Click OK.
5. Restart the PBX.
a. Click Maintenance ® System Control ® System Reset.
b. On the System Reset screen, click Backup.
c.
d.
e.
f.
*1
*2
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
Notice
•
•
•
•
•
Do not change the IP address of the PBX once IP telephones are registered to the PBX using the set
IP address. The IP telephones will not operate properly if the IP address of the PBX is changed. When
an external DHCP server is used to automatically assign IP addresses, it must be configured to always
allocate the same IP address to the PBX. For details, consult your network administrator.
If an external DHCP server is in use, it must be able to use a "client identifier" option specified by RFC
2131.
If an external DHCP server is in use, the DHCP Server feature of the PBX must be disabled.
The PBX will not start properly if IP addresses cannot be assigned automatically by the DHCP server
when the PBX has been set to obtain IP addresses automatically. In this case, you need to consult
your network administrator because the DHCP server in your network may not be running or a network
failure may have occurred. If the DHCP server is not available, enter IP addresses manually, then
restart the PBX.
During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system
data to the PBX memory. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
PBX memory, it can be easily reloaded.
To save the system data to the PBX memory while programming, click the disk button (
•
) ® Yes
® OK. Be sure to save the system data to the PBX memory before restarting the PBX, or any changes
may be lost.
When no operations are performed for more than 60 minutes (default), you will be automatically logged
out from Web Maintenance Console and unsaved data will be lost.
Changing the Display Language
The language used for Web Maintenance Console can be changed after the Easy Setup Wizard has completed.
1. Click Setup ® Users ® User Profiles.
2. Select the check box for the Installer level account.
172
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.4.3 Installing the Virtual IP Cards to the PBX
3. Click
.
The Edit User screen will be displayed.
4. Select the preferred language in Change Language.
5. Click OK.
The screen will redisplay in the selected language immediately.
5.4.2 Enabling the DHCP Server Feature
This PBX is equipped with a DHCP Server feature. When the feature is enabled, it allows you to centrally
manage and automate the assignment of IP addresses for the devices located in same LAN using Web
Maintenance Console.
1.
Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ®
DHCP.
2.
On the DHCP Server tab, select Enable for DHCP
Server.
3.
Enter valid settings for the IP address auto
assignment.
Note
For details about IP address auto assignment
settings, refer to "27.2.1 Network Service—[2-1]
Server Feature—DHCP" in the PC Programming
Manual.
4.
Click OK.
Note
If an external DHCP server is in use, do not enable the DHCP Server feature. Doing so may allocate
inappropriate IP addressing information to the devices.
5.4.3 Installing the Virtual IP Cards to the PBX
Document Version 2016-03
1.
Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration
® Slot.
2.
Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and in the
menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
3.
Click on the name of the virtual card to install in the list
on the right. An image of the virtual card will be displayed
to the left of the list, and information about the card will
be shown below.
4.
Click and drag the image of the virtual card to the free
virtual slot it is to be installed in, and release it. The virtual
card will move into the slot space.
5.
Click OK to confirm.
Installation Manual
173
5.4.5 Configuration of the Activation Keys
5.4.4 Installing Additional Activation Keys
The corresponding number of IP CO lines, IP telephones or enhanced features can be activated by installing
the downloaded activation key file(s) using Web Maintenance Console.
Installing the Activation Key Files
Be sure to connect the PC to the PBX in advance. For details about Web Maintenance Console, refer to
"5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account.
2. Click Maintenance ® Utility ® Activation Key Installation.
Activation Key Installation window will be displayed.
3. Click Browse and specify the directory where the activation key files are stored, and click Open.
4. A list of activation key files stored in the specified directory is displayed. Check the boxes next to the
activation keys to install to the PBX, and click Install.
5. When installation is complete, the message, "The activation key has been installed and activated
successfully!" is displayed.
6. Click OK.
Notice
The activation key file can only be installed in the PBX with the MPR ID number entered when the activation
key file was downloaded. The activation key file cannot be reissued unless the mother board crashes.
Note
•
•
You can click the provided link to directly access activation key information and program the number
of activated IP CO lines and IP softphones.
For information about programming activation keys using Web Maintenance Console, refer to "9.3 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status" in the PC Programming Manual.
5.4.5 Configuration of the Activation Keys
Depending on your configuration, it may be necessary to program the number of provided IP CO Line channels
to be used for H.323 CO lines. By default, all of the provided IP CO Line channels will be used for SIP CO
lines.
Similarly, you can program how many IP softphone(s) can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary
Telephone/P-SIP Extension activation key. By default, only IP softphone(s) can be used through the IP
Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone/P-SIP Extension activation key.
174
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.4.5 Configuration of the Activation Keys
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Click Activation Key.
2.
a. In Number of activated IP-GW, type the number of
IP CO Line channels to be used for H.323 CO lines.
Note
If you have changed the value for Number of
activated IP-GW, you must click Execute to
restart the V-IPGW16 cards for the change to
take effect.
b. In Number of activated IP-Softphone, type the
number of IP softphones to be used through the IP
Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key.
3.
Document Version 2016-03
Click OK.
Installation Manual
175
5.5.1 Assigning the Hunt Pattern
5.5 Programming an H.323 QSIG Network
There are 2 methods to program the Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card (V-IPGW16 card) to establish
VoIP communications between PBXs at different locations, as follows:
PBX code method
The caller dials the unique PBX code of the PBX to which the called party is
connected, in addition to the destination number.
Extension number
method
The caller dials only the destination number of the called party to call through
PBXs at different locations (hence there are fewer digits to dial than with the
PBX code method).
Note
•
•
For a detailed explanation about each method, refer to "15.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES"
in the Feature Manual.
Portions of this software are © 1996–2006 RADVISION Ltd. All intellectual property rights in such
portions of the Software and documentation are owned by RADVISION and are protected by United
States copyright laws, other applicable copyright laws and international treaty provisions. RADVISION
and its suppliers retain all rights not expressly granted.
5.5.1 Assigning the Hunt Pattern
The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP CO lines to the PBX. The procedure
below demonstrates the process of programming the hunt pattern of the local PBX. After the hunt pattern at
the local PBX has been fully assigned, repeat the procedure for the hunt pattern at the remote PBX with the
appropriate setting values.
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and
in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the installed
V-IPGW16 card. A menu will be shown under the
mouse pointer.
d. Click Shelf Property.
e. Click Hunt Pattern.
Status Light
2.
a. When using the PBX code method:
In the Leading Number cell, type the local PBX
code and extension starting digit.
When using the extension number method:
In the Leading Number cell, type the local extension
starting digit.
b. Click OK to return to the Shelf Property screen.
176
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.5.2 Programming the Address Translation Table
Note
For more details about hunt pattern assignment, refer to "9.11.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—Hunt Pattern" in the PC Programming Manual.
5.5.2 Programming the Address Translation Table
The function of an address translation table in a VoIP network is to provide 2-way translation of telephone
numbers and IP addresses*1. Therefore, a caller can reach the destination by dialing the number without
knowing the destination IP address.
The procedure below demonstrates the process of programming the address translation table at the local PBX.
After the address translation table at the local PBX has been fully programmed, repeat the procedure for the
address translation table at the remote PBX with the appropriate setting values.
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Click System Property.
c. Click the V-IPGW tab.
d. Click GW Settings.
2.
In the Main tab, do the following to configure the
gateway entry for the remote PBX:
a. In the GW Name cell, type a unique identifier of the
destination in the VoIP network.
b. In the GW IP Address cell, type the IP address of
the destination gateway device.
c. In the GW Group cell, select None.
Note
Having the value None for GW Group means
that the destination gateway device does not
belong to any gateway group. Grouping is useful
when installing multiple gateway devices at one
location. For details, refer to "9.2.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main"
in the PC Programming Manual.
d. Click OK to return to the System Property screen.
*1
IP address-to-telephone number translation can also be handled by using an H.323 Gatekeeper device. To configure Gatekeeper
devices, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation. This manual focuses on the method using the V-IPGW16 card’s internal address
translation capabilities.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
177
5.5.2 Programming the Address Translation Table
3.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
b.
c.
d.
e.
Configuration ® Slot.
Click System Property.
Click the V-IPGW tab.
Click DN2IP.
When using the PBX code method:
In the Leading Number cell, type the remote PBX
code and starting digit of destination extension.
When using the extension number method:
In the Leading Number cell, type the remote PBX
code and starting digit of destination extension.
f. In the Remaining Number of Digits cell, type a
number of digits to dial following the leading number.
g. In GW No./GW Group Selection, select GW No.
h. In the GW No. cell, select 1 (the gateway entry for
the destination gateway device at the remote PBX).
i. Click OK.
Note
For more details about gateway settings, refer to "9.2.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System Property—Main—V-IPGW–GW Settings–Main" in the PC Programming
Manual.
178
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.5.3 Programming the Network Settings
5.5.3 Programming the Network Settings
For successful operation of a VoIP network using the V-IPGW16 card, network settings for the PBX at each
location must be programmed appropriately. For a detailed discussion of related features, refer to the Feature
Manual.
This section details the procedure to program the network settings for the local PBX. After the programming
for the local PBX has been done, repeat the procedure for the remote PBX with the appropriate setting values.
The following procedures describe the process of programming the network settings for each numbering
method.
Programming for the PBX Code Method
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® CO &
Incoming Call.
b. Click CO Line Settings.
c. Type the CO Name and assign an unused Trunk
Group Number to be used for all IP CO lines.
d. Click OK.
2.
Note
Before changing Numbering Plan settings, when a
V-SIPEXT32 card or V-UTEXT32 card is installed,
change the status of the card(s) to OUS.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® System.
Click Numbering Plan.
Click Main.
Click the Features tab.
In the TIE Line Access cell, type the dialing number.
Click OK.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Private
Network.
b. Click TIE Table.
c. In the Own PBX Code cell, type the PBX code of the
local PBX in the network.
d. In the first unused Leading Number cell, type the
PBX code of the remote PBX in the network.
e. In the corresponding Trunk Group list, select the
number of the trunk group to be used when making
calls.
f. If it is necessary to add number(s) to the input
number, enter the number(s) to be added in the
desired Added Number cell.
If it is necessary to delete number(s) from the input
number, enter the number(s) to be deleted in the
desired Removed Number of Digits cell.
g. Click OK.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
179
5.5.3 Programming the Network Settings
Programming for the Extension Number Method
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® CO &
Incoming Call.
b. Click CO Line Settings.
c. Type the CO Name and assign an unused Trunk
Group Number to be used for all IP CO lines.
d. Click OK.
2.
Note
Before changing Numbering Plan settings, when a
V-SIPEXT32 card or V-UTEXT32 card is installed,
change the status of the card(s) to OUS.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® System.
Click Numbering Plan.
Click Main.
Click the Other PBX Extension tab.
In the Dial (3 digits) cell, type a starting digit of
destination extension.
Click OK.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Private
Network.
b. Click TIE Table.
c. In the Leading Number cell, type the starting digit
of destination extension.
d. Click OK.
Note
For details about network parameter settings, refer to the relevant sections of the PC Programming Manual.
180
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.6 Programming SIP CO Lines
5.6 Programming SIP CO Lines
The Virtual 16-Channel SIP CO Line Card (V-SIPGW16) is a virtual CO line card which is designed to be easily
integrated into an Internet Telephony Service provided by an ITSP (Internet Telephony Service Provider).
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP gateway port.
Accessing Port Properties
1.
Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration
® Slot.
2.
Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and in the
menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
3.
Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPGW16 card to
display the menu of options, and then click Ous.
4.
Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPGW16 card to
display the menu of options again, and then click Port
Property.
Programming Port Properties
Automatic Programming
Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each
virtual SIP gateway port. Available SIP providers can be selected, and a different SIP provider can be assigned
to each virtual SIP gateway port.
Note
It is necessary to import a SIP provider list file (comma-separated value [CSV] file) in advance to use the
automatic programming feature.
Follow the steps below to configure a SIP provider.
1. Click Select Provider.
A dialog box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. From the Provider menu, select the desired SIP provider.
Note
If the desired SIP provider is not shown in the drop-down list, it is necessary to program the desired
parameters manually. For information about the manual programming procedure, refer to "Manual
Programming" below.
3. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to
be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2.
4. Click Execute.
Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP
gateway ports.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
181
5.6 Programming SIP CO Lines
Manual Programming
Follow the steps below to program the parameters which are not automatically programmed by selecting a
provider.
1. Click the desired tab.
2. Enter information or select settings from the drop-down list for each parameter.
Parameters that Require Manual Programming
Manual programming is compulsory for the following parameters:
• User Name: Specifies the user name (SIP Account) provided by the SIP provider. (Max. 64 characters)
• Authentication ID: Specifies the authentication ID required for registration with the SIP server. (Max. 64
characters)
• Authentication Password: Specifies the authentication password used for registration with the SIP
provider. (Max. 32 characters)
Follow the steps below to program these 3 parameters.
1.
Click an Account tab.
2.
In the User Name column, enter the user name provided
by the SIP provider.
3.
In the Authentication ID column, enter the
authentication ID required for registration with the SIP
server.
4.
In the Authentication Password column, the
authentication password used for registration with the
SIP provider.
5.
Click OK.
Adding Settings to Provider Profiles
Follow the steps below to add the settings to provider profiles.
1.
Click Add Provider.
A dialog box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway
port numbers are displayed in the list.
2.
Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to
select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to add
the settings to provider profiles.
3.
Click Execute.
Note
For more details about SIP gateway port settings, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
182
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
5.7 Assigning Networking Information to IP
Telephones
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
The IP telephone’s IP address, subnet mask address and default gateway address, and the PBX’s IP address
must be assigned to the IP telephone before it can be used on the network. This IP addressing information
can be assigned in the following ways:
For IP-PTs
•
Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on the
same LAN as the PBX
The DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-PT, the subnet mask address, and the
default gateway address to the IP-PT.
The PBX’s IP address can also be assigned automatically to the IP-PT in the process of being registered
to the PBX. For details about registering the IP-PT, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
Note
For information about the DHCP Server feature, refer to "8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) Server".
•
Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on a
remote office LAN
While the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-PT, the subnet mask address, and
the default gateway address to the IP-PT, the PBX’s IP address must be assigned manually.
Follow the procedure below to assign the PBX’s IP address.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, follow the procedure described in "5.7.2 Setting VLAN
Parameters" after assigning the IP addresses, without ending programming.
Note
•
•
•
By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-PT, it is possible to assign the PBX’s IP address to
other IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For details, refer to
"9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option—
Announce Mode" in the PC Programming Manual.
IP-PTs can only receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server on its own LAN. Therefore,
when IP-PTs are located on several LANs, a DHCP server is required on each LAN.
Since the default setting of the DHCP client function is enabled for IP-PTs, simply connect the
IP-PTs to the LAN to use the DHCP server.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
183
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) and KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551)
To start programming
SETUP
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press "SETUP"
when it is displayed.
To enter the IP address of the PBX
*1
Select "PBX".
ENTER
Select "PBX IP Address".
ENTER
Select "Primary PBX".
PBX IP Address
ENTER
ENTER
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX*2
PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary PBX".
ENTER
ENTER
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
OR
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
*1
*2
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press "STORE".
For KX-NT300 series: Software version 2.00 or later only
For KX-NT500 series: Software version 1.00 or later only
Optional for KX-NT300 series (Software version 2.00 or later only) and KX-NT500 series (Software version 1.00 or later only)
Note
The illustrations may differ from the buttons on your telephone.
184
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT321/KX-NT551
To start programming
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM
while "Searching" is displayed.
To enter the IP address of the PBX
Select "PBX".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "PBX IP
Address".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Primary
PBX".
PBX IP Address
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX (if required)
PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary
PBX".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD twice to return
to the Menu screen.
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
OR
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
Note
•
To confirm the connection to the secondary PBX after assigning IP addressing information, (1) turn
the IP-PT’s power off, and (2) hold the STORE button and 2 key while turning the power on.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
185
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT265 (Software version 2.00 or later only)
To start programming
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM
while "Searching" is displayed.
To enter the IP address of the PBX
HOLD
PBX IP
Address
Press VOLUME
to select "PBX".
Press SP-PHONE
twice.
Press SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
OR
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
186
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
•
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on
the same LAN as the PBX
Only the PBX’s IP address can be assigned automatically to the IP-PT in the process of being registered
to the PBX. For details about registering the IP-PT, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
Follow the procedure below to assign the IP address of the IP-PT, the subnet mask address, and the default
gateway address manually.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, follow the procedure described in "5.7.2 Setting VLAN
Parameters" after assigning the IP addresses, without ending programming.
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) and KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551)
To start programming
SETUP
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press "SETUP" when it is displayed.
To set the IP address of the IP-PT
ENTER
Select "Network".
Select "Disable"
for DHCP setting.
ENTER
Select "IP Address".
IP Address*1
ENTER
To set the subnet mask address
Subnet Mask Address*2
Select "Subnet Mask".
ENTER
ENTER
To set the default gateway address (if required)
Default Gateway Address*3
Select "Default Gateway".
ENTER
ENTER
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX*4
Return to the
Menu screen.
Select "PBX".
ENTER
Select "PBX IP
Address".
ENTER
Select "Secondary
PBX".
PBX IP Address
ENTER
ENTER
Continued on next page
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
187
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
Continued from previous page
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
Return to the
Menu screen.
OR
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
*1
*2
*3
*4
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press "STORE".
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Optional for KX-NT300 series (Software version 2.00 or later only) and KX-NT500 series (Software version 1.00 or later only)
Note
The illustrations may differ from the buttons on your telephone.
188
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT321/KX-NT551
To start programming
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM
while "Searching" is displayed.
To set the IP address of the IP-PT
Select "Network".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "DHCP (Disable)".
Press SP-PHONE
twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the subnet mask address
Subnet Mask Address*2
Select "Subnet Mask".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the default gateway address (if required)
Default Gateway Address*3
Select "Default GW".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX (if required)
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
Select "PBX".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "PBX IP
Address".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Secondary
PBX".
PBX IP Address
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD twice to return
to the Menu screen.
Continued on next page
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
189
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
Continued from previous page
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
OR
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
*1
*2
*3
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Note
•
190
To confirm the connection to the secondary PBX after assigning IP addressing information, (1) turn
the IP-PT’s power off, and (2) hold the STORE button and 2 key while turning the power on.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT265 (Software version 2.00 or later only)
To start programming
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM
while "Searching" is displayed.
To set the IP address of the IP-PT
Press VOLUME to
select "Network".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press VOLUME to
select "DHCP (Disable)".
Press SP-PHONE
twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the subnet mask address
Subnet Mask Address*2
Press VOLUME to
select "Subnet Mask".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the default gateway address (if required)
Default Gateway Address*3
Press VOLUME to
select "Default GW".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To set VLAN parameters
HOLD
To the VLAN settings
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
OR
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
HOLD
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
*1
*2
*3
Press STORE.
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
191
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
•
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-PT is on
a remote office LAN
All of the IP addressing information must be assigned manually.
Follow the procedure below to assign the IP addressing information.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, follow the procedure described in "5.7.2 Setting VLAN
Parameters" after assigning the IP addresses, without ending programming.
Note
By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-PT, it is possible to assign the PBX’s IP address to other
IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For details, refer to "9.14 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPEXT—Option— Announce Mode" in
the PC Programming Manual.
192
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) and KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551)
To start programming
SETUP
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press "SETUP" when it is displayed.
To set the IP address of the IP-PT
Select "Network".
ENTER
Select "Disable"
for DHCP setting.
Select "IP Address".
ENTER
IP Address*1
ENTER
To set the subnet mask address
Subnet Mask Address*2
Select "Subnet Mask".
ENTER
ENTER
To set the default gateway address
Default Gateway Address*3
Select "Default Gateway".
ENTER
ENTER
To enter the IP address of the PBX
*4
Return to the
Menu screen.
Select "PBX".
ENTER
Select "PBX IP
Address".
ENTER
Select "Primary
PBX".
PBX IP Address
ENTER
ENTER
Continued on next page
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
193
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
Continued from previous page
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX*5
PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary PBX".
ENTER
ENTER
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
Return to the
Menu screen.
OR
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press "STORE".
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
For KX-NT300 series: Software version 2.00 or later only
For KX-NT500 series: Software version 1.00 or later only
Optional for KX-NT300 series (Software version 2.00 or later only) and KX-NT500 series (Software version 1.00 or later only)
Note
The illustrations may differ from the buttons on your telephone.
194
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT321/KX-NT551
To start programming
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM
while "Searching" is displayed.
To set the IP address of the IP-PT
Select "Network".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "DHCP (Disable)".
Press SP-PHONE
twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the subnet mask address
Subnet Mask Address*2
Select "Subnet Mask".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the default gateway address
Default Gateway Address*3
Select "Default GW".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To enter the IP address of the PBX
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
Select "PBX".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "PBX IP
Address".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Primary
PBX".
PBX IP Address
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To enter the IP address of the Secondary PBX (if required)
PBX IP Address
Select "Secondary
PBX".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
Continued on next page
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
195
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
Continued from previous page
Press HOLD twice to return
to the Menu screen.
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
OR
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
*1
*2
*3
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Note
•
196
To confirm the connection to the secondary PBX after assigning IP addressing information, (1) turn
the IP-PT’s power off, and (2) hold the STORE button and 2 key while turning the power on.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
KX-NT265 (Software version 2.00 or later only)
To start programming
Supply power to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM
while "Searching" is displayed.
To set the IP address of the IP-PT
Press VOLUME to
select "Network".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press VOLUME to
select "DHCP (Disable)".
Press SP-PHONE
twice.
IP Address*1
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the subnet mask address
Subnet Mask Address*2
Press VOLUME to
select "Subnet Mask".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the default gateway address
Default Gateway Address*3
Press VOLUME to
select "Default GW".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To enter the IP address of the PBX
HOLD
Press HOLD
twice to return
Press VOLUME
to the Menu screen. to select "PBX".
HOLD
PBX IP
Address
Press SP-PHONE
twice.
Press
SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD
to return to the
Menu screen.
To set VLAN parameters
To the VLAN settings
OR
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
*1
*2
*3
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Valid subnet mask address range: "0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except "0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
Valid IP address range: "1.0.0.0" to "223.255.255.255"
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
197
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
For KX-UT Series SIP Phones
Notice
When you want to use a KX-UT series SIP phone that has already been used with another PBX, or that
has had its settings programmed, you must reset the SIP phone to its factory default before assigning new
IP address information as detailed in the following procedure.
For details, refer to the documentation for the KX-UT series SIP phone.
Assigning the IP addressing information to the SIP phone
• Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) to automate the assignment
of IP addressing information
The DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the SIP phone, the subnet mask address, and
the default gateway address to the SIP phone.
The PBX’s IP address can also be assigned automatically to the SIP phone in the process of being
registered to the PBX. For details about registering the SIP phone, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP
Telephones".
Note
For information about the DHCP Server feature, refer to "8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) Server".
•
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when assigning IP
addressing information
Only the PBX’s IP address can be assigned automatically to the SIP phone in the process of being
registered to the PBX. For details about registering the SIP phone, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP
Telephones". The IP address of the SIP phone, the subnet mask address, and the default gateway address
must be assigned manually. For instructions, refer to the documentation of the SIP phone.
Note
•
•
When the PBX is not in the same network as the SIP phone, the IP address of the PBX must be
assigned manually. For instructions for manually setting PBX network information, refer to
"Assigning the IP address of the PBX to a SIP phone".
When assigning IP addressing information to the SIP phone, do not use the phone’s Web user
interface programming.
Assigning the IP address of the PBX to a SIP phone
The IP address of the PBX is automatically assigned to a SIP phone when the SIP phone is in the same LAN
as the PBX. However, when the SIP phone is in a different LAN from the PBX, the following procedure is
required to assign the IP address of the PBX manually using the Web user interface.
Notice
Do not perform any other operation rather than following procedure with the Web user interface. Otherwise
the SIP phone may not work properly. In that case, contact an authorized Panasonic Factory Service
Center.
1. Prepare a configuration file to specify the IP address of the PBX.
When the SIP Phones are in a segment that uses NAT traversal
a. Open a text editor on a PC, and then write exactly same as the following:
198
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
For standard connection
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
### Management Server Settings #######
ACS_URL="http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy/cwmp/cwmpAction.cgi"
For secure connection
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
### Management Server Settings #######
ACS_URL="http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy/cwmp/cwmpAction.cgi"
CFG_INT_CERTIFICATE_PATH=http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:zzz/utdownload/KX-NS700
Notice
•
•
For "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy", enter the IP address and port number of the network router which is
in a same LAN with the PBX.
The router accessed by the SIP phone must have static NAT/NAPT settings enabled so that
the packets sent to xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy to be transferred to the PBX. For details, refer to
"Connection via Internet" in "5.2 PC Connection" and "Internet Connection (TLS
Connection):" in "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
Configuration files must end with an empty line.
b. Save the text file as "UT_ACS.cfg".
When the SIP Phones are in a different segments of the same LAN
a. Log in to the Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
b. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
c. Select the config file (UT_ACS_xxyyyy.cfg), and then download it to your PC.
For more details about downloading files from a PBX to a PC, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer
PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
Note
xx: Site ID (2 digits)
yyyy: Site name*1 (Up to 32 characters*2)
*1
*2
Spaces as well as the following characters in site names will be replaced with underscores.
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
In some cases, the full site name may not be included in the file name even if it is less than 32 characters.
When the SIP Phones are in a different LAN (Remote site installation)
a. Log in to the Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
b. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
c. Select the config file (UT_ACS_HTTPS_xxyyyy.cfg), and then download it to your PC.
Note
•
xx: Site ID (2 digits)
yyyy: Site name*1 (Up to 32 characters*2)
*1
*2
•
Spaces as well as the following characters in site names will be replaced with underscores.
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
In some cases, the full site name may not be included in the file name even if it is less than 32 characters.
When SIP phones use the internet to communicate with the PBX, the PBX uses the HTTPS
protocol for security.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
199
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
2. Confirm the IP address of the SIP phone.
For non-KX-UT670 telephones
a. Press Setting or Setup (soft button) on the SIP phone.
b. Select "Information Display", then press [ENTER].
c. Select "IP address".
The IP address of the SIP phone will be displayed.
d. Press [CANCEL].
For KX-UT670 telephones
a. Tap the status bar.
For details about the status bar, refer to the documentation of the KX-UT670.
b. Tap Phone status.
The IP address of the SIP phone will be displayed.
c. Tap OK.
3. Open the port of the SIP phone, which is used by the PCs to access the Web user interface.
For non-KX-UT670 telephones
a. Press Setting or Setup (soft button) on the SIP phone.
b. Press [#][5][3][4].
c. Select "On" for "Embedded web", then press [ENTER].
Note
If no operations are made for 30 minutes, the port will be closed again automatically.
For KX-UT670 telephones
.
a. On the Home screen, press
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Tap Settings.
Tap About Phone.
Touch and hold
.
Press [#][5][3][4], and then press Enter.
Select On for Embedded web.
Note
If no operations are made for 30 minutes, the port will be closed again automatically.
4. Access the Web user interface from the PC.
Note
If a KX-UT670 with software version 01.200 or lower is used with the PBX, the KX-UT670 must be
reset to its factory default before you perform the following procedure. For details about resetting the
KX-UT670, refer to the documentation of the KX-UT670.
a. Open your Web browser, and then enter "http://" followed by the SIP phone’s IP address into the
address field of your browser.
b. For authentication, enter your ID and password, and then click OK.
The Installer Level ID and Password are as follows.
ID: instoperatoruserid
Password: instpass
c. Select Maintenance ® Import Configuration File.
d. Click Browse… , and then select the UT_ACS configuration file. (UT_ACS.cfg or UT_ACS_xxyyyy.cfg)
e. Click Import.
200
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
When the configuration file is successfully imported, the SIP phone starts to access the PBX
automatically.
5. Confirm if the configuration file was successfully loaded.
a. Select Maintenance ® Export Configuration File.
b. Click Export to download the configuration file being used currently on the SIP phone.
c. Compare the UT_ACS configuration file and the downloaded file. If the UT_ACS configuration file was
successfully loaded, the contents of those 2 files will be exactly the same.
Notice
When the 2 UT_ACS configuration files do not match, and if the SIP phone does not work properly,
contact an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
For Non-KX-UT Series SIP Phones (including P-SIP)
Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) to automate the assignment
of IP addressing information
The IP address of the SIP phone, the subnet mask address, and the default gateway address can be assigned
to the SIP phone automatically by the DHCP server.
The PBX’s IP address must be assigned manually on the SIP phone side.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
201
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
For instructions, refer to the documentation of the SIP phone.
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when assigning IP
addressing information
All of the IP addressing information must be assigned manually.
For instructions, refer to the documentation of the SIP phone.
Note
•
•
A SIP phone can only receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server on its own LAN. Therefore,
when SIP phones are located on several LANs, a DHCP server is required on each LAN.
When the DHCP client function is enabled for SIP phones, simply connect them to the LAN to use the
DHCP server. For details about the DHCP client function setting, refer to the documentation of the SIP
phone.
For IP-CSs
Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on the same
LAN as the PBX
The DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-CS, the subnet mask address, and the
default gateway address to the IP-CS.
The PBX’s IP address can also be assigned automatically to the IP-CS in the process of being registered
to the PBX.
For details about registering the IP-CS, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones" and corresponding
manuals for the IP-CS.
Note
•
For information about the DHCP Server feature, refer to "8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) Server".
Using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on a remote
office LAN
While the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP address of the IP-CS, the subnet mask address, and
the default gateway address to the IP-CS, the PBX’s IP address must be assigned manually.
To assign the PBX’s IP address, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, refer to the corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
Note
•
•
•
By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only), it is possible to assign the
PBX’s IP address to other IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For
details, refer to "9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port
Property—V-IPCS—Option— Announce Mode" in the PC Programming Manual.
IP-CSs can only receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server on its own LAN. Therefore,
when IP-CSs are located on several LANs, a DHCP server is required on each LAN.
Since the default setting of the DHCP client function is enabled for IP-CSs, simply connect the
IP-CSs to the LAN to use the DHCP server.
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on the
same LAN as the PBX
Only the PBX’s IP address can be assigned automatically to the IP-CS in the process of being registered
to the PBX.
For details about registering the IP-CS, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones" and corresponding
manuals for the IP-CS.
202
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
To assign the IP address of the IP-CS, the subnet mask address, and the default gateway address
manually, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
Not using a DHCP server (DHCP Server feature or an external DHCP server) when the IP-CS is on a
remote office LAN
All of the IP addressing information must be assigned manually.
To assign the IP addressing information, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
If you need to set VLAN parameters, refer to corresponding manuals for the IP-CS.
Note
By assigning the PBX’s IP address to one IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only), it is possible to assign the PBX’s IP
address to other IP-PTs or IP-CSs on the same LAN through system programming. For details, refer to
"9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—V-IPCS—Option— Announce
Mode" in the PC Programming Manual.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
203
5.7.2 Setting VLAN Parameters
5.7.2 Setting VLAN Parameters
To establish voice communications between IP telephones, the primary ports of the IP telephones and the
connected PBX must belong to the same VLAN. Consult your network administrator and obtain the appropriate
VLAN ID.
If you are using an IP telephone equipped with two ports, it is possible to place primary and secondary ports
of the IP telephone on different VLANs by assigning separate VLAN IDs to each port.
Follow the procedure below for all IP-PTs on the network, using appropriate VLAN IDs.
Note
The procedure for SIP phones may vary depending on the type of the SIP phone being used. Refer to the
documentation of your SIP phone for instructions.
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) and KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551)
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS".
ENTER
ENTER
Select "VLAN".
Select "Enable" for
VLAN setting.
To set the VLAN ID for the primary port
VLAN ID
ENTER
Select "Primary port".
Select "VLAN ID".
ENTER
1–4094
0-4094 (Only for KX-NT55x)
VLAN Priority*1
ENTER
Select "VLAN Priority".
ENTER
ENTER
0–7
To set the VLAN ID for the secondary port
Return to the
VLAN setting screen.
Select
"Secondary port (TO PC)".
ENTER
*1
1
VLAN Priority
VLAN ID
1–4094
0-4094 (Only for KX-NT55x)
ENTER
Select "VLAN ID".
ENTER
Select
"VLAN Priority".
ENTER
0–7
ENTER
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
*1
204
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press "STORE".
The VLAN priority of the primary port must be set higher than the priority of the secondary port. The larger the number, the higher
the priority.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.2 Setting VLAN Parameters
Note
The illustrations may differ from the buttons on your telephone.
KX-NT321/KX-NT551
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS".
Select "VLAN (Enable)".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "VLAN".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the VLAN ID for the primary port
VLAN ID
Select "VLAN (Primary)".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "VLAN ID".
1–4094
Press SP-PHONE.
0-4094 (Only for KX-NT55x)
VLAN Priority*1
Select "Priority".
0–7
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the VLAN ID for the secondary port
VLAN ID
Select "VLAN (Secondary)".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "VLAN ID".
1–4094
Press SP-PHONE.
0-4094 (Only for KX-NT55x)
VLAN Priority*1
Select "Priority".
0–7
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press HOLD three
times to return to the
Menu screen.
*1
Press STORE.
The VLAN priority of the primary port must be set higher than the priority of the secondary port. The larger the number, the higher
the priority.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
205
5.7.2 Setting VLAN Parameters
KX-NT265 (Software version 2.00 or later only)
After assigning
the IP addresses
Press VOLUME to
select "QoS".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press VOLUME to
select "VLAN".
1–4094
Press VOLUME to
select "VLAN (Enable)".
VLAN Priority
VLAN ID
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
0–7
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
HOLD
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
206
Installation Manual
Press STORE.
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.3 Setting LLDP Parameters
5.7.3 Setting LLDP Parameters
LLDP-MED is a technique for IP telephones to obtain VLAN settings automatically from a network device, such
as a Network Switch.
If you are using an IP telephone equipped with two LAN ports, the primary and secondary ports of the IP
telephone can be placed on different VLANs by assigning a separate VLAN ID to each port. Follow the
procedure below for all IP-PTs on the network, using appropriate VLAN IDs.
Note
•
•
•
This feature is available only for KX-NT551, KX-NT553, and KX-NT556 IP-PTs.
VLAN settings configured through PT programming have priority over VLAN settings configured
through the LLDP-MED function.
To enable or disable the sending of LLDP packets from the PBX, consult your dealer.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
207
5.7.3 Setting LLDP Parameters
KX-NT553/KX-NT556
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS".
ENTER
ENTER
Select "LLDP".
Select "Enable" for
LLDP setting.
To set the VLAN ID for the primary port
VLAN ID*1
ENTER
Select "Primary port".
ENTER
Select "VLAN ID".
0–4094
VLAN Priority*1*2
ENTER
Select "VLAN Priority".
0–7
To set the VLAN ID for the secondary port
Return to the
LLDP setting screen.
Select
"Secondary port".
ENTER
ENTER
Select "VLAN ID".
VLAN ID*1
*1*2
1
VLAN Priority
ENTER
0–4094
ENTER
Select
"VLAN Priority".
ENTER
0–7
To set the Interval time for LLDP
Return to the
LLDP setting screen.
Select
"LLDP (Secondary)".
ENTER
Select "LLDP (Interval)".
ENTER
INTERVAL
1–3600
ENTER
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
*1
*2
208
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press "STORE".
The VLAN ID and the VLAN priority are set automatically for the primary port; these are reference only. However, the VLAN ID and
the VLAN priority for secondary port must be set manually.
The VLAN priority of the primary port must be set higher than the priority of the secondary port. The larger the number, the higher
the priority.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.3 Setting LLDP Parameters
KX-NT551
After assigning
the IP addresses
Select "QoS".
Select "Enable"
for LLDP setting.
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "LLDP".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the VLAN ID for the primary port
VLAN ID*1
Select "LLDP (Primary)".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "VLAN ID".
0–4094
Select "Priority".
VLAN Priority*1*2
0–7
To set the VLAN ID for the secondary port
VLAN ID*1
Select "LLDP (Secondary)".
Press SP-PHONE.
0–4094
Select "VLAN ID".
Press SP-PHONE.
VLAN Priority*1*2
Select "Priority".
0–7
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the Interval time for LLDP
INTERVAL
Select "LLDP (Secondary)".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "LLDP (Interval)".
Press SP-PHONE.
1–3600
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press HOLD three
times to return to the
Menu screen.
*1
*2
Press STORE.
The VLAN ID and the VLAN priority are set automatically for the primary port; these are reference only. However, the VLAN ID and
the VLAN priority for secondary port must be set manually.
The VLAN priority of the primary port must be set higher than the priority of the secondary port. The larger the number, the higher
the priority.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
209
5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters
5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters
Differentiated Services (DiffServ, or DS) is an IP-based QoS technique used to control QoS of VoIP
communications by setting the DS field in the header of IP packets. Consult your network administrator for the
appropriate setting values for the DS field.
Follow the procedure below to set the Diffserv parameters. Only KX-NT300 series IP-PTs, KX-NT500 series
IP-PTs, and KX-NT265 IP-PTs can be used to set the parameters.
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) and KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551)
To start programming
SETUP
Press "SETUP"
when it is displayed.
Select "Qos".
ENTER
ENTER
Select "Diffserv".
To set the DS field value for the primary port
Select "Primary Port".
ENTER
Select "Enable".
ENTER
Diffserv
0.0–7.7
ENTER
To set the DS field value for the secondary port (only for KX-NT300 series)
Return to the
Diffserv setting screen.
Select
"Secondary Port (TO PC)".
ENTER
Select "Enable".
Diffserv
ENTER
0.0–7.7
ENTER
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press "STORE".
Note
The illustrations may differ from the buttons on your telephone.
210
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters
KX-NT321/KX-NT551
To start programming
Press PROGRAM while
"Searching" is displayed.
Select "QoS".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Diffserv".
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the DS field value for the primary port
Select "Primary Port".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "DS (Enable)".
Press SP-PHONE.
Diffserv
0.0–7.7
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the DS field value for the secondary port (only for KX-NT300 series)
Press HOLD to return to
the Diffserv setting screen.
Select "Secondary Port".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "DS (Enable)".
Diffserv
Press SP-PHONE.
0.0–7.7
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
Press HOLD until the
Menu screen is displayed.
Document Version 2016-03
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
Installation Manual
211
5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters
KX-NT265 (Software version 2.00 or later only)
To start programming
Press PROGRAM while
"Searching" is displayed.
Press VOLUME to
select "QoS".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press VOLUME to
select "Diffserv".
Press SP-PHONE.
To set the DS field value
Diffserv
Press VOLUME to
select "DS (Enable)".
Press SP-PHONE.
0.0–7.7
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
HOLD
Press HOLD until the
Menu screen is displayed
212
Installation Manual
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports
A KX-NT300 series IP-PT user, KX-NT500 series IP-PT user, or KX-NT265 IP-PT user can configure the port
number of PTAP, DHCP, and FTP ports. Consult your network administrator to check whether the configuration
of the IP ports is required.
Follow the procedure below to configure the port number of the IP ports.
Note
•
•
If you wish to change the port number back to default, enter 0 as the port number for the desired port.
To delete 1 character, use "CLEAR" for KX-NT300 series IP-PTs and KX-NT500 series IP-PTs, or use
[TRANSFER] for KX-NT265, KX-NT321 and KX-NT551.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
213
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) and KX-NT500 series (except and KX-NT551)
To start programming
SETUP
Password
Select "IP Port".
Press "SETUP"
when it is displayed.
ENTER
7678
ENTER
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports
*1
Select "PTAP Server Port".
ENTER
Select "Primary PBX".
ENTER
Port No.
ENTER
1024–65535
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports for the Secondary PBX*2
Select "PTAP Server Port".
ENTER
Select "Secondary PBX".
ENTER
Port No.
1024–65535
ENTER
Port No.
Return to the
Menu screen.
Select
"PTAP Client Port".
ENTER
ENTER
1024–65535
To configure the port number of DHCP Ports
Port No.
Select "DHCP Server Port".
ENTER
67, 1024–65535
ENTER
Port No.
Select "DHCP Client Port".
ENTER
68, 1024–65535
ENTER
Continued on next page
214
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports
Continued from previous page
To configure the port number of FTP Ports
Port No.
Select "FTP Server Ctrl Port".
ENTER
21, 1024–65535
ENTER
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Ctrl Port".
ENTER
1024–65535
ENTER
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Data Port".
ENTER
1024–65535
ENTER
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
*1
*2
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press "STORE".
For KX-NT300 series (Software version 2.00 or later only) and KX-NT500 series (Software version 1.00 or later only)
Optional for KX-NT300 series (Software version 2.00 or later only) and KX-NT500 series (Software version 1.00 or later only)
Note
The illustrations may differ from the buttons on your telephone.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
215
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports
KX-NT321/KX-NT551
To start programming
Password
Press PROGRAM while
"Searching" is displayed.
Select "IP Port".
Press SP-PHONE.
7678
Press SP-PHONE.
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports
Select "PTAP Server".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Primary PBX".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD.
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
1024–65535
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports for the Secondary PBX (if required)
Select "PTAP Server".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Secondary PBX".
Press SP-PHONE.
Press HOLD.
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
1024–65535
Port No.
Select "PTAP Client".
Press SP-PHONE.
1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
To configure the port number of DHCP Ports
Port No.
Select "DHCP Server".
Press SP-PHONE.
67, 1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Select "DHCP Client".
Press SP-PHONE.
68, 1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Continued on next page
216
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports
Continued from previous page
To configure the port number of FTP Ports
Port No.
Select "FTP Server Ctrl".
Press SP-PHONE.
21, 1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Ctrl".
Press SP-PHONE.
1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Select "FTP Client Data".
Press SP-PHONE.
1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
Document Version 2016-03
Press STORE.
Installation Manual
217
5.7.5 Configuration of IP Ports
KX-NT265 (Software version 2.00 or later only)
To start programming
Password
Press PROGRAM while
"Searching" is displayed.
Press VOLUME to
select "IP Port".
Press SP-PHONE.
7678
Press SP-PHONE.
To configure the port number of PTAP Ports
Port No.
Press VOLUME to
select "PTAP Server".
Press SP-PHONE.
1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Press VOLUME to
select "PTAP Client".
Press SP-PHONE.
1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
To configure the port number of DHCP Ports
Port No.
Press VOLUME to
select "DHCP Server".
Press SP-PHONE.
67, 1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Press VOLUME to
select "DHCP Client".
Press SP-PHONE.
68, 1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
To configure the port number of FTP Ports
Port No.
Press VOLUME to
select "FTP Server Ctrl".
Press SP-PHONE.
21, 1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Press VOLUME to
select "FTP Client Ctrl".
Press SP-PHONE.
1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
Port No.
Press VOLUME to
select "FTP Client Data".
Press SP-PHONE.
1024–65535
Press SP-PHONE.
To end programming
HOLD
Press HOLD to return
to the Menu screen.
218
Installation Manual
The IP-PT will reboot
and can then be
registered to the PBX.
Press STORE.
Document Version 2016-03
5.7.6 ECO mode (KX-NT500 series only)
5.7.6 ECO mode (KX-NT500 series only)
ECO mode allows a KX-NT500 series IP-PT to consume less power than in normal mode.
To start ECO mode, follow the procedure below.
KX-NT553/KX-NT556
To start programming
Supply power
to the IP-PT.
SETUP
Press "SETUP"
when it is displayed.
Select "ECO Mode".
ENTER
Select "On".
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
The IP-PT will reboot in
ECO mode.
Press "STORE".
KX-NT551
To start programming
Supply power
to the IP-PT.
Press PROGRAM while
"Searching" is displayed.
Select "ECO Mode".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "On".
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot in
ECO mode.
Press HOLD to return to
the Menu screen.
Press "STORE".
Notice
•
•
When a KX-NT500 series IP-PT is in ECO mode, the following limitations are applied:
– The second Ethernet port is disabled.
– The port of the switching hub to which the telephone is connected must be 10 Mbps (Fixed)/full
duplex.
For KX-NT500 series IP-PTs (software version V1.010 or later), you can specify the connection mode
(Auto Negotiation, 10 Mbps/full duplex, 10 Mbps/half duplex, 100 Mbps/full duplex, 100 Mbps/half
duplex). If a connection with Auto Negotiation fails, the connection will be made in either 10 Mbps/half
duplex or 100 Mbps/half duplex.
To exit from ECO mode, turn off the KX-NT500 series IP-PT, and then follow the procedure below.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
219
5.7.6 ECO mode (KX-NT500 series only)
KX-NT553/KX-NT556
To start programming
Supply power
to the IP-PT.
SETUP
Press "SETUP"
when it is displayed.
Select "ECO Mode".
ENTER
Select "Off".
To end programming
STORE
Return to the
Menu screen.
The IP-PT will reboot in
normal mode.
Press "STORE".
KX-NT551
To start programming
Supply power
to the IP-PT
Press PROGRAM while
"Searching" is displayed.
Select "ECO Mode".
Press SP-PHONE.
Select "Off".
To end programming
The IP-PT will reboot in
normal mode.
Press HOLD to return to
the Menu screen.
220
Installation Manual
Press "STORE".
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
5.8 Registering IP Telephones
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
After the programming of the PBX and IP telephones is finished (refer to "5.7 Assigning Networking Information
to IP Telephones"), the IP telephones must be registered to the PBX. The procedure for registering IP
telephones differs according to the IP terminal registration mode specified during the Easy Setup Wizard. The
IP Terminal Registration Mode and IP-CS Registration Mode settings can be changed in the Site
Property—Main screen of the Web Maintenance Console (refer to "9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System Property—Site—Main— IP Terminal Registration Mode" in the PC
Programming Manual). Refer to the following table:
IP Terminal Registration Mode/IP-CS Registration Mode
IP Terminals
Full Automatic Mode
Extension Number
Input Mode
Manual Mode
IP-PTs
ü
ü
ü
KX-UT Series SIP
Phones
ü
ü*1
ü
Non-KX-UT series SIP
phones (including
P-SIP)
ü*2
ü*2
ü
IP-CSs*3
ü
–
ü
ü: Available
*1
*2
*3
KX-UT series SIP phones will be registered automatically, in the same way as Full Automatic mode.
Non-KX-UT series SIP phones must always be registered to the PBX manually, even if Full Automatic mode or Extension Number
Input mode is selected.
For details about registering IP-CSs, refer to the Installation Guide for the IP-CS.
Note
•
•
For KX-UT series SIP phones, the SIP extension password is automatically set to "1234".
For IP softphones, follow the same registration procedure as IP-PTs.
Full Automatic Mode
If networking settings have been completed, when IP-PTs, KX-UT series SIP phones, or IP-CSs are connected
to the same network as the PBX, they will be registered automatically. No registration procedure is required.
Extension Number Input Mode
For IP-PTs
If networking settings have been completed, when IP-PTs are connected to the same network as the PBX,
they will be registered automatically, but extension numbers for the IP-PTs will not be set. Follow the procedure
below to register an extension number to complete registration.
1. After completing networking settings, connect the IP-PT to the same network as the PBX. The screen to
enter the extension number is displayed on the IP-PT.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
221
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
2. Enter an extension number.
Note
When no extension number is entered in this step, the process will time out and the IP-PT will be
registered without an extension number.
3. Press [ENTER]*1 on the IP-PT.
4. Press [PAUSE] or "EXIT" on the IP-PT.
*1
For KX-NT551/KX-NT321 users, press [AUTO DIAL/STORE].
For models other than the above models that do not have the applicable buttons, consult your dealer.
For KX-UT Series SIP Phones
If networking settings have been completed, when KX-UT series SIP phones are connected to the same
network as the PBX, they will be registered automatically as same as when they are registered in Full Automatic
mode. No registration procedure is required.
Note
•
•
No more than 64 IP-PTs can register extension numbers at the same time.
If an extension number that is input for an IP-PT has already been set to another extension, registration
by this mode will fail.
Note that some extension numbers are pre-configured to other extensions by default. Avoid using such
numbers, or delete them before starting the registration process.
Manual Mode
For IP-PTs or KX-UT Series SIP Phones
After connecting IP-PTs or KX-UT series SIP phones to the PBX over a network, register those IP terminals
to the PBX manually.
Follow the procedure below for registration.
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and
in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. For IP-PTs:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card).
For KX-UT series SIP phones:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card
(Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
To register the IP-PT or KX-UT series SIP phone by entering the MAC address directly:
222
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
2.
If the Connection column for the port is INS, click INS,
and then click OUS on the dialog box to change the
port’s status.
3.
Enter the MAC address of the IP-PT or SIP phone in the
IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address) cell.
4.
Click Apply.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully registered,
its status will update to show "Registered".
5.
In the Connection column for the port, click OUS, and
then click INS on the dialog box to change the port’s
status.
6.
For KX-UT series SIP phones only:
Follow the procedure below to change the IP Terminal
Registration Mode from Manual to Full Automatic.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot ® System Property ®
Site ® Main.
b. In the Main tab, select Full Automatic for IP
Terminal Registration Mode.
c. Click OK.
To register the IP-PT or KX-UT series SIP phone using the wizard:
2.
Click Registration.
A dialog box will appear. Non-registered (available)
extension numbers and names are displayed on the left.
3.
a. Highlight numbers and names and click the right
arrow to select them for registration, and then click
Next.
b. Click Next. A screen will appear with information on
the current IP-PT or SIP phone extension number
and name, and index number for programming.
Note
•
•
If the IP-PT or SIP phone has been
connected to the LAN and power has been
turned on, the IP address of the PBX will be
assigned automatically.
If not, connect the IP-PT or SIP phone to the
LAN and turn the power on within 15 minutes
after this operation is done. The IP address
of the PBX will then be assigned
automatically.
c. If the registration is still in progress, the dialog box
will show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialog box will
show "Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully
registered, its status will update to show
"Registered".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
223
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
For Non-KX-UT Series SIP Phones (including P-SIP)
After connecting non-KX-UT series SIP phones to the PBX over a network, register those IP terminals to the
PBX manually.
Follow the procedure below for registration.
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and
in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
2.
224
Installation Manual
Assign extension numbers to the SIP extensions.
• If the Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension
Card feature is enabled, the extension numbers of
SIP extension are automatically assigned. To
program this feature, refer to "9.31 PBX
Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option—
New Card Installation—Automatic Extension
Number Set for Extension Card" in the PC
Programming Manual.
• If not, enter the extension number for each SIP
extension manually.
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
3.
Set passwords for the SIP extensions.
a. Click the cell in the Connection column for each SIP
extension you wish to register. The Command
Connection screen appears.
b. Click OUS.
c. Enter a password in the Password cell for each SIP
extension.
d. Click Apply.
e. Click the cell in the Connection column for each SIP
extension to which a password has been assigned.
The Command Connection screen appears.
f. Click INS.
g. Click OK.
Note
•
•
•
Document Version 2016-03
Alternatively, it is possible to set an extension
number as a password for each SIP extension
automatically.
In order to set the password automatically, do
the following in substitution for step c of the
procedure above.
a. Click Copy to. A screen will appear with
information on assigned extension numbers
for SIP extensions.
b. Click Select All.
c. Click Execute to copy each Extension
Number to Password.
d. Click Yes.
e. Click OK to return to the Port Property
screen.
When copying extension numbers to
icon on the
passwords, you can also use the
bottom left of the Virtual SIP Extension Port
Property screen.
Installation Manual
225
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
4.
Program the SIP extension you wish to register.
a. Set the IP address of the PBX, extension number,
and password in the corresponding fields for your
SIP extension.
b. Send a request from the SIP extension to the PBX
for registration.
• If the authentication information of the SIP
extension and the PBX match, the registration is
successful.
Note
•
•
•
226
Installation Manual
When programming the SIP extension, the
names of the corresponding fields may differ
depending on the type of SIP phone you are
using.
For details about the actual operation of SIP
phones, refer to the documentation of the SIP
phone.
For certain SIP phones, you may need to set a
Sign-in name, which should consist of the
extension number and the IP address of the PBX
(e.g., 350@192.168.0.101).
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones
5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones
Note
For details about de-registering IP-CSs, refer to the documentation for the IP-CS.
De-registration of IP-PTs or KX-UT Series SIP Phones
1.
Make sure the IP Terminal Registration Mode is set to
Manual.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot ® System Property ®
Site ® Main.
b. In the Main tab, select Manual for IP Terminal
Registration Mode.
c. Click OK.
2.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and
in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. For IP-PTs:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card).
For KX-UT series SIP phones:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card
(Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
3.
Click De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers
and names are displayed on the left.
4.
a. Highlight numbers and names and click the right
arrow to select them for de-registration.
b. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
c. Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box
will show "De-registration succeed!".
d. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP telephone will update to show
"None".
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
227
5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones
Forced De-registration of IP-PTs or KX-UT Series SIP Phones
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register an IP-PT when normal de-registration was unsuccessful.
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and
in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. For IP-PTs:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card).
For KX-UT series SIP phones:
Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card
(Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
2.
Click Forced De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers
and names are displayed on the left.
3.
a. Highlight numbers and names and click the right
arrow to select them for de-registration.
b. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
c. Click OK.
A dialog box will appear.
d. Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box
will show "Forced de-registration succeed!".
e. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT or SIP phone is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP telephone will update to show
"None".
228
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones
De-registration of Non-KX-UT Series SIP Phones (including P-SIP)
The de-registration of non-KX-UT series SIP phones is carried out by deleting either the extension number or
password registered in the PBX.
1.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ®
Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and
in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-SIPEXT32 card
(Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
2.
a. Click the cell in the Connection column for the port
of the SIP phone to de-register.
b. In the Command window, click OUS to change the
status of the port to "OUS".
Document Version 2016-03
3.
Repeat step 2 for each SIP phone to de-register.
4.
Delete either the extension number or password for the
SIP phone to de-register, as shown here.
5.
Click OK.
Installation Manual
229
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site
If an SBC (Session Border Controller) is present on the same local network as the PBX, you can install SIP
phones at remote sites without needing to configure special network settings (NAT traversal, etc.).
This section provides information about the procedure for connecting SIP Phones at a remote site that has
SBC hardware.
When SIP phones in remote sites use the internet to communicate with the PBXs, use the HTTPS protocol for
security. If the connection is within a VPN and protected, you may use the HTTP protocol.
Internet
Main Unit*1
Switching Hub
Switching Hub
Router
SBC
IP-PT
Main Site (Headquarters)
Router
KX-UT series
SIP phone
Remote Site
: RTP packets
*1
KX-NS700
Note
•
•
•
•
•
Install the SBC in the same LAN as the PBX.
A PBX can work with only one SBC. Also, multiple sites can share an SBC.
The PBX can support up to 20 remote extensions at the same time via SBC when using the HTTPS
protocol.
All the RTP packets in between the main site and the remote site is routed to the SBC for security and
for IP address conversion.
When settings of remote extensions being used at remote sites are changed at the PBX at the main
site, the reflection of the changes to the remote extension may require some time due to data transfer
protocols.
Programming the PBX
Follow the procedures below to configure remote port settings using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For the procedures below, program WAN side IP information of the router at the main site.
This information is sent to KX-UT series SIP phones at the remote site after completing all programming.
For Site Property Settings
1. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
2. Move the mouse pointer over System Property.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
3. Click Site.
4. Click the SIP Extension tab.
5. Click Advanced Setting for Remote SIP-MLT.
Program the WAN side IP information in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT.
230
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site
a. Program the following common settings.
Configure the following items in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP-MLT.
WAN Side IP information of
the router at the main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
CWMP
IP Address
NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
SIP
IP Address
NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address
Port Number
NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
NTP
IP Address
NAT - NTP Server IP Address
Port Number
NAT - NTP Server Port No.
b. Program the following settings according to the protocol used by KX-UT series SIP phones in the
remote site.
When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS
WAN Side IP information of
the router at the main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
CWMP
Port Number
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
For Data Download
Port Number
NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTPS) Port No.
When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP
WAN Side IP information of
the router at the main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
CWMP
Port Number
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
For Data Download
Port Number
Document Version 2016-03
NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server (HTTP) Port No.
Installation Manual
231
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site
6. Click OK.
7. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
8. Move the mouse pointer over System Property.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
9. Click Site.
10. Click Port Number tab.
11. Program the following items according to the protocol used by KX-UT series SIP phones in the remote site.
a. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS:
• CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
b. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP:
• CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
Note
For the default port numbers of the PBX, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
12. Click OK.
13. Make a backup of the data that includes the above settings.
Click Setup ® System Control ® System Reset ® Backup.
Using the PBX as an NTP server
When the PBX will be used as an NTP server, follow the procedures below.
1. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® NTP.
2. Select Enable.
3. Click OK.
Programming the SBC
The following items need to be configured on the SBC. For information about configuring the SBC, refer to the
documentation of the SBC.
• IP address of the PBX
• Port numbers of the KX-UT series SIP phones installed in the remote site
• IP address and subnet mask of the SBC
• LAN side IP address of the router at the main site
• WAN side IP address of the router at the main site
• SIP receiving port settings (For details, refer to the documentation of your SBC)
Note
For SIP receiving port of the SBC, specify the same port number that is specified at NAT - SIP Proxy
Server Port No. in step 5 in "Programming the PBX" in this section.
•
RTP Start Port (UDP) and RTP End Port (UDP)
Note
Make sure the RTP Start Port (UDP) and RTP End Port (UDP) specified for the SBC above are in the
range of the RTP port numbers that the PBX uses.
For the range of RTP port numbers of the PBX, refer to "Port Numbers for Optional DSP Card" in
"8.6 Port Security".
•
232
Firewall settings to allow SIP packets and RTP packets
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site
Programming the router at the main site
Port forwarding settings (Router – SBC)
Configure the following items for port forwarding in between the SBC and the router.
Application
LAN Side Port Number
WAN Side Port Number
SIP Proxy
NAT-SIP Proxy Port No.
(Use the same value as NAT - SIP
Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX".)
NAT-SIP Proxy Port No.
(Use the same value as NAT - SIP
Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX".)
RTP (UDP)
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)
Make sure the RTP Start Port (UDP) and the RTP End Port (UDP) specified
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the PBX uses. For the
range of RTP port numbers that the PBX uses, refer to "Port Numbers for
Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".
Note
For information about configuring port forwarding on the router, refer to the documentation of the router.
Port forwarding settings (Router – PBX)
Configure the following items for port forwarding between the PBX and the router.
Application
LAN Side Port Number
WAN Side Port Number
CWMP
HTTP
CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX".)
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX".)
HTTPS
CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX".)
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX".)
HTTP
Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP)
Port No. for SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX".)
NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server
(HTTP) Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX".)
HTTPS
Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS)
Port No. for SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX".)
NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server
(HTTPS) Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX".)
SIP-MLT Data
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
233
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site
Application
NTP
*1
LAN Side Port Number
123*1
WAN Side Port Number
NAT - NTP Server Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX".)
The port number for NTP that the PBX uses is fixed to 123.
Note
For information about configuring port forwarding on the router, refer to the documentation of the router.
Installing KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site
There are 2 methods to install KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site:
• Set up KX-UT series SIP phones at the main site using the PBX, and then send them to the remote site.
• Set up KX-UT series SIP phones without connecting them to the PBX at the main site, and then send them
to the remote site.
Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones at the main site, and then sending them to remote site
1. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
2. Program the settings for the KX-UT series SIP phones.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
b. Place the mouse cursor over the Virtual Slot, and in the menu that appears, click Select Shelf.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card (Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
e. Click Remote Place tab.
f. Configure the items shown below.
• Select a protocol (HTTP/HTTPS) for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT.
Note
When a SIP phone at remote site uses the internet to communicate with the PBX, use the
HTTPS protocol for security. If the connection is on VPN and protected, you may use the HTTP
protocol.
• Change the value to Remote (SBC) for Phone Location.
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the KX-UT series SIP phone, and then plug it in again to reboot the KX-UT series
SIP phone manually.
The KX-UT series SIP phone will download settings automatically.
Note
•
•
After downloading the setting information for the remote site, the KX-UT series SIP phone will not
connect to the PBX if it is connected to the LAN at the main site. After some time, the KX-UT series
SIP phone will display "9002: Connection Failed".
Depending on the settings of your router, the KX-UT series SIP phone may connect to the PBX. In
such cases, proceed to step 4.
4. Send the KX-UT series SIP phone to the remote site and connect it to the LAN in the remote site.
Note
The KX-UT series SIP phone is already registered to the PBX and programmed with the remote site
configuration. There is no operation required for the KX-UT series SIP phone at the remote site.
234
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.3 Installing SIP Phones at a Remote Site
Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones without connecting to the PBX at the main site, and then
sending them to the remote site
1. Log in to the Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
2. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
3. Select the config file according to the protocol used and then download it to your PC.
• HTTP is used
– UT_ACS_xxyyy.cfg
• HTTPS is used
– UT_ACS_HTTPS_xxyyyy.cfg
For more details about downloading files from a PBX to a PC, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer
PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
Note
xx: Site ID (2 digits)
yyyy: Site name*1 (Up to 32 characters*2)
*1
*2
Spaces as well as the following characters in site names will be replaced with underscores.
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
In some cases, the full site name may not be included in the file name even if it is less than 32 characters.
4. Download the config file to the KX-UT series SIP phone via the Web user interface of the KX-UT series
SIP phone.
For details, refer to "When the SIP Phones are in a different LAN (Remote site installation)" in
"5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information".
5. Connect the KX-UT series SIP phone to the LAN at the remote site.
6. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone to the PBX as a remote extension.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
b. Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card (Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
c. Click Port Property.
d. Click Remote Place tab.
e. Configure the items shown below.
• Change the value to Remote (SBC) for Phone Location.
• Change the value to Enable for Web-MC Ability.
• Select a protocol (HTTP/HTTPS) for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT.
Note
Select the same value as you selected for NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX" in this section.
f. Click OK.
7. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
Note
•
•
You can select HTTPS for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT only when Phone Location is set as
Remote (SBC).
If the KX-UT series SIP phones don't work normally, confirm if the KX-UT series SIP phones are able
to access to internet.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
235
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media
Relay Gateway
The PBX contains a built-in Media Relay Gateway. You can install and register IP-PTs (KX-NT500 series),
Panasonic IP-Softphones, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), KX-UT series SIP phones and third party SIP phones
at a remote site without adding an SBC (Session Border Controller). Also, you do not need to configure special
network settings (NAT traversal, etc.) at the remote site.
Internet
PBX
Switching Hub
Switching Hub
Built in Media Router
Relay Gateway
Router
KX-UT
series
SIP phone
Remote Site
IP-PT
PC
IP-PT
Main Site
: LAN
: WAN
Note
•
•
•
This feature does not require an activation key.
There is no limit to the number of terminals that can use the Media Relay Gateway feature.
However, there are some conditions, as follows:
– Peer-to-peer communication is not supported for the built-in Media Relay Gateway.
– The number of terminals using TR-069 (CWMP)-based HTTPS is limited.
For information about which telephone models support the built-in Media Relay Gateway, consult your
dealer.
Programming the PBX with Built-in Media Relay Gateway
Follow the procedures below to configure remote port settings using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For the procedures below, program WAN side IP information of the router at the main site. This information
is sent to KX-NT500 series, IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only), or KX-UT series SIP phones in the remote site after
completing all programming.
For Site Property Settings
1. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
2. Move the mouse pointer over System Property.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
3. Click Site.
4. Click the Media Relay tab.
236
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
5. Program the WAN side information in Media Relay tab.
a. Program the following common settings in Common.
WAN Side IP information of the router at
the main site
IP Address
*1
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
NAT - External IP Address*1
You can also program individual items of the NAT - External IP Address. For more details, see step e.
b. Program the following settings according to the protocol used by the KX-NT500 series IP extensions
and IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) in the remote site. Configure the following items in IP Extension /
IP-CS.
WAN Side IP information of the router at the
main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
MGCP
Port Number
NAT - MGCP Server Port No.
Port Number (for IP-CS [KX-NS0154 only])
NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
FTP
Port Number
NAT - FTP Server Port No.
c. Program the following settings according to the protocol used by the KX-UT series SIP extensions and
SIP extensions in the remote site. Configure the following items in SIP Extension / UT Extension.
WAN Side IP information of the router at the
main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
SIP
Port Number
NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
d. Program the following settings according to the protocol used by the KX-UT series SIP extensions in
the remote site. Configure the following items in UT Extension.
– When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS:
WAN Side IP information of the router at the
main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
CWMP
Port Number
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No.
Port Number
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port No. for
Network Survivability
For Data Download
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
237
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
WAN Side IP information of the router at the
main site
Port Number
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server
(HTTPS) Port No.
– When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP:
WAN Side IP information of the router at the
main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
CWMP
Port Number
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No.
Port Number
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port No. for
Network Survivability
For Data Download
Port Number
NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download Server
(HTTP) Port No.
e. Program the following common settings in Option.
WAN Side IP information of the router at the
main site
Web Maintenance Console Parameter
RTP
IP Address
NAT - RTP IP Address
SIP
IP Address
NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address
CWMP
IP Address
NAT - CWMP Server IP Address
IP Address
NAT - CWMP Server IP Address for
Network Survivability
NTP
IP Address
NAT - NTP Server IP Address
If necessary, you can program the individual settings here and overwrite the NAT - External IP
Address setting programmed in step a.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
238
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
8. Move the mouse pointer over System Property.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
9. Click Site.
10. Click the Port Number tab.
11. Program the following items according to the protocol used by KX-UT series SIP phones in the remote site.
a. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTPS:
• CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
b. When the KX-UT series SIP phones are using HTTP:
• CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
• Data Transmission Protocol (HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
Note
For the default port numbers of the PBX, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
12. Click OK.
Using the PBX as an NTP server
When the PBX will be used as an NTP server, follow the procedures below.
1. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® NTP.
2. Select Enable.
3. Click OK.
Programming the router at the main site with Built-in Media Relay Gateway
Port forwarding settings (Router – PBX)
Configure the following items for port forwarding between the Media Relay Gateway and the router.
For the KX-NT500 series:
Application
LAN Side Port Number
WAN Side Port Number
PTAP
Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No.
(Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-SIPEXT")
Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No.
(Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-SIPEXT")
MGCP
Signaling (MGCP) UDP Port No.
(Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-SIPEXT")
NAT - MGCP Server Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
RTP (UDP)
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*1
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*1
Make sure the RTP Start Port (UDP) and the RTP End Port (UDP) specified
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the PBX uses. For the
range of RTP port numbers that the PBX uses, refer to "Port Numbers for
Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".*1
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
239
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
Application
FTP
*1
LAN Side Port Number
The port number used for the FTP
protocol. This is used for software
updates.
WAN Side Port Number
NAT - FTP Server Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
The port number ranges must be within the range of RTP/RTCP for NAT traversal (16000–18047).
Up to 2 IP addresses can be assigned to the PBX’s optional DSP cards.
For the IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only):
Application
LAN Side Port Number
WAN Side Port Number
PTAP
Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No.
(Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-IPCS")
Signaling (PTAP) UDP Port No.
(Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-IPCS")
MGCP
Signaling (MGCP) UDP Port No.
(Server)
(refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property—V-IPCS")
NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for
IP-CS
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
RTP (UDP)
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*1
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*1
Make sure the RTP Start Port (UDP) and the RTP End Port (UDP) specified
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the PBX uses. For the
range of RTP port numbers that the PBX uses, refer to "Port Numbers for
Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".*1
FTP
*1
The port number used for the FTP
protocol. This is used for software
updates.
NAT - FTP Server Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
The port number ranges must be within the range of RTP/RTCP for NAT traversal (16000–18047).
For the KX-UT series:
Application
SIP Proxy
LAN Side Port Number
UDP Port No. for SIP Extension
Server
(refer to PC Programming Manual
"9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Site—Port Number")
WAN Side Port Number
NAT-SIP Proxy Port No.
(Use the same value as NAT - SIP
Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway")
CWMP
240
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
Application
LAN Side Port Number
WAN Side Port Number
HTTP
CWMP (HTTP) Port No. for
SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTP) Port
No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
HTTPS
CWMP (HTTPS) Port No. for
SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
NAT - CWMP Server (HTTPS) Port
No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
HTTP
Data Transmission Protocol
(HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
Data Transmission Protocol
(HTTP) Port No. for SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
HTTPS
Data Transmission Protocol
(HTTPS) Port No. for SIP-MLT
(Use the same value as in step 11 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
NAT - SIP-MLT Data Download
Server (HTTPS) Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
123*1
NAT - NTP Server Port No.
(Use the same value as in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in
Media Relay Gateway".)
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*2
Start/End RTP (UDP) Port No.
(Use port numbers that are in the
range of the RTP ports that the PBX
uses.)*2
SIP-MLT Data
NTP
RTP (UDP)
Make sure the RTP Start Port (UDP) and the RTP End Port (UDP) specified
for the router are in the range of the RTP ports that the PBX uses. For the
range of RTP port numbers that the PBX uses, refer to "Port Numbers for
Optional DSP Card" in "8.6 Port Security".*2
*1
*2
The port number for NTP that the PBX uses is fixed to 123.
The port number ranges must be within the range of RTP/RTCP for NAT traversal (16000–18047).
Up to 2 IP addresses can be assigned to the PBX’s optional DSP cards.
Installing KX-NT500 series IP-PTs at a remote site with Built-in Media Relay
Gateway
You can install KX-NT500 series IP-PTs at the remote site directly or from the local site as follows.
1. Register the IP-PT. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
2. Program the settings for the IP-PT.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
b. Click Virtual ® V-IPEXT32.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
241
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPEXT32 card (Virtual IP Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
e. Click the Remote Place tab.
f. Configure the items shown below.
• Change the value to Remote (MRG) for Phone Location.
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the IP-PT, and then plug it in again to reboot the IP-PT manually. The IP-PT will
download settings automatically.
Installing IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) at a remote site with Built-in Media Relay
Gateway
You can install IP-CSs (KX-NS0154 only) at the remote site directly or from the local site as follows.
1. Register the IP-CS. For details, refer to corresponding manuals of KX-NS0154.
2. Program the settings for the IP-CS.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
b. Click Virtual ® V-IPCS4.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-IPCS4 card (Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
e. Click the Remote Place tab.
f. Configure the items shown below.
• Change the value to Remote (MRG) for Phone Location.
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the IP-CS, and then plug it in again to reboot the IP-CS manually. The IP-CS
will download settings automatically.
Installing KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site with Built-in Media Relay
Gateway
There are 2 methods to install KX-UT series SIP phones at a remote site:
• Set up the phones at the main site using the PBX, and then send them to the remote site.
• Set up the phones without connecting them to the PBX at the main site, and then send them to the remote
site.
Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones at the main site, and then sending them to remote site
1. Register the phone. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
2. Program the settings for the phone.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
b. Click Virtual ® V-UTEXT32.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card (Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
e. Click the Remote Place tab.
f. Configure the items shown below.
• Change the value to Remote (MRG) for Phone Location.
• Select a protocol (HTTP/HTTPS) for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT.
242
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
Note
When a SIP phone at a remote site uses the internet to communicate with the PBX, use the
HTTPS protocol for security. If the connection is on a VPN and is protected, you may use the
HTTP protocol.
g. Click OK.
3. Unplug the AC adaptor of the phone, and then plug it in again to reboot the phone manually. The phone
will download settings automatically.
Note
•
•
After downloading the setting information for the remote site, the KX-UT series SIP phone will not
connect to the PBX if it is connected to the LAN at the main site. After some time, the KX-UT series
SIP phone will display "9002: Connection Failed".
Depending on the settings of your router, the KX-UT series SIP phone may connect to the PBX. In
this case, proceed to step 4.
4. Send the KX-UT series SIP phone to the remote site and connect it to the LAN in the remote site.
Note
The KX-UT series SIP phone is already registered to the PBX and programmed with the remote site
configuration. No operation is required for the KX-UT series SIP phone in the remote site.
Setting up KX-UT series SIP phones without connecting to the PBX at the main site, and then
sending them to the remote site
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console of the site where the SIP phones will be registered.
2. Click Utility ® File ® File Transfer PBX to PC.
3. Select the config file according to the protocol used and then download it to your PC.
• If HTTPS is used:
– UT_MRG_HTTPS_xxyyyy.cfg
For more details about downloading files from a PBX to a PC, refer to "7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer
PBX to PC" in the PC Programming Manual.
Note
xx: Site ID (2 digits)
yyyy: Site name*1 (Up to 32 characters*2)
*1
*2
Spaces as well as the following characters in site names will be replaced with underscores.
/, :, *, ?, ", <, >, | (vertical bar), &, +
In some cases, the full site name may not be included in the file name even if it is less than 32 characters.
4. Download the config file to the KX-UT series SIP phone via the Web user interface of the KX-UT series
SIP phone. For details, refer to "When the SIP Phones are in a different LAN (Remote site installation)" in
"5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information".
5. Connect the KX-UT series SIP phone to the LAN in the remote site.
6. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone to the PBX as a remote extension.
a. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
b. Click Virtual ® V-UTEXT32.
c. Move the mouse pointer over the V-UTEXT32 card (Virtual UT Extension Card).
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
d. Click Port Property.
e. Click the Remote Place tab.
f. Configure the items shown below.
• Change the value to Remote (MRG) for Phone Location.
• Change the value to Enable for Web-MC Ability.
• Select a protocol (HTTP/HTTPS) for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
243
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
Note
Select the same value as you selected for NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No. in step 5 of
"Programming the PBX with Built-in Media Relay Gateway" in this section.
g. Click OK.
7. Register the KX-UT series SIP phone. For details, refer to "5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones".
Note
•
•
244
You can select HTTPS for Protocol for Remote SIP-MLT only when Phone Location is set as
Remote (MRG).
If the KX-UT series SIP phone does not work normally, confirm whether the KX-UT series SIP
phone can access the internet.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.9 Configuration of Users
5.9 Configuration of Users
The system manages information about each user.
Before programming other user settings, the following information must be configured for each user:
• Extension number
• Name
• Unified Messaging mailbox
• Web Maintenance Console login account (ID and password)
Follow the procedure below to efficiently program basic personal information by adding multiple users with the
Add Range feature.
1. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
Add one or more extension cards to the system, according to your equipment and needs. Extension
numbers will be automatically created for each extension card that is added. For details about adding
extension cards, refer to "9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot" in the PC Programming
Manual.
2. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Extension.
Enter an extension name for each extension number to be used. For details, refer to the following sections
in the PC Programming Manual:
• 12.1.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1-1] Extension—Wired Extension—Extension Settings
• 12.2.1 PBX Configuration—[4-2-1] Extension—Portable Station—Extension Settings
Note
You also can import extension names from a CSV file. For details refer to "6.5 Tool—Import" in the
PC Programming Manual.
3. Click Setup ® Users ® User Profiles.
Select Rule of copy to extension name on the Option tab.
Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]
4. Click Setup ® Users ® User Profiles.
You can create multiple user profiles automatically by using the Add Range feature for extension numbers.
You can also set an extension number, first name, last name, Unified Messaging mailbox, and Web
Maintenance Console login account for each user manually.
For details, refer to "User Controls" in "8.1 Users—User Profiles" in the PC Programming Manual.
For each user profile added using the Add Range feature, the following information is automatically
assigned:
• First Name/Last Name
Extension Name, which is the name displayed on extension LCDs, can be copied all at once to the
First Name and Last Name settings for each extension.
The format you selected in Rule of copy to extension name in step 3 determines how these are
copied.
– Case 1: You selected Rule-A, and the format of the name is assumed to be "[First Name] (space)
[Last Name]".
– Case 2: You selected Rule-B, and the format of the name is assumed to be "[Last Name], [First
Name]".
– Case 3: Extension Name is set to not follow Rule of copy to extension name:
•
•
Example of copying Extension Name
User Profile
Extension Name
First Name
Case 1
Document Version 2016-03
Tarou Yamada
Tarou
Last Name
Yamada
Installation Manual
245
5.9 Configuration of Users
User Profile
Extension Name
First Name
Last Name
Case 2
Yamada,Tarou
Tarou
Yamada
Case 3
TarouYamada
Ext. 101
TarouYamada
•
Login ID: The extension number (i.e., if the extension is "101", the Login ID for the user will also be
"101")
• Password: "PWD" + the extension number for the user (e.g., "PWD101")
5. If additional editing is required for users, settings can be configured on the following screens:
a. To edit user information: Setup ® Users ® User Profiles
b. To edit extension settings: Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Extension
c. To edit mailbox settings: Setup ® UM Configuration ® Mailbox Settings
Note
•
•
246
You also can create mailboxes for Incoming Call Distribution Groups on the Mailbox
Settings screen.
Since the Built-in Unified Messaging System is part of this PBX, the settings of the following
items are shared between the PBX and Unified Messaging system.
a. Date and time, and enable/disable settings in Holiday Table
The following 2 items are shared. For details, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
– 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
– 23.4 UM Configuration—[4-4] Service Settings—Holiday Table
b. Mailboxes with the same mailbox number as their associated extension numbers
When the same mailbox number is used as the extension number, it is possible to select
whether the system keeps the two synchronized (i.e., one changes when the other does).
For details about the setting, refer to "10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System
Options—Option 9" in the PC Programming Manual.
For instance, when an extension number is changed, the mailbox number of the mailbox
assigned to that extension changes to match the new extension number. However, if a
mailbox with the same number already exists, the mailbox number will not change.
c. Mailbox COS
When assigning COS levels to user profiles (either extension or mailbox), by default the
extension COS and mailbox COS are set to the same level. You can specify whether these
values are synchronized by the system.
For details, refer to "10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option
9" in the PC Programming Manual.
If enabled, when one COS setting is changed, the other will change to match the new
setting. (When this setting is first enabled, the extension COS setting is used as the mailbox
COS.)
d. Since the outside line access number and CO line call (transfer) procedures are
synchronized in the PBX settings, each outside line access number (e.g., idle line access,
trunk group access, specified line access) are available for features that make calls (e.g.,
External Message Delivery). These features will first recognize the outside line access
number part of a number, and then perform dial tone detection, etc.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice
Users with Unified Messaging (UM) mailboxes (referred to below as "subscribers") can receive their voice as
data using the following methods:
– Receiving attachments to a POP3 e-mail account
– Accessing data through an IMAP4 e-mail account
Receiving Attachments to a POP3 E-mail Account
An e-mail can be sent to Unified Message system subscribers, notifying them of a new voice. Subscribers can
also choose to have the voice message attached to the notification, as well as choose to have the message
deleted from the system after it has been sent.
1. Specify SMTP server settings.
a. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® SMTP.
b. Specify the name to be used for the e-mail messages that will be sent from the system in Mail
sending—Mail sender information name.
c. Specify the e-mail address for the e-mail messages that will be sent from the system in Mail
sending—Mail Address.
d. Specify the IP address or host name of the SMTP server to use in SMTP server for relay—SMTP
server address.
e. Specify the port number of the SMTP server to use in SMTP server for relay—SMTP server Port
number.
f. Specify the following parameters if required.
– SMTP over TLS
– SMTP Authentication
– POP before SMTP
– Receive Port number (SMTP)
– Receive Port number (SMTPs)
Note
For details about these parameters, refer to "27.2.5 Network Service—[2-6] Server
Feature—SMTP" in the PC Programming Manual.
g. Click OK.
2. Specify e-mail options.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® System Parameters ® Parameters ® E-mail Option.
b. Specify the following parameters.
– Mail Address (Up to 128 ASCII characters)
– Full Name (Up to 64 ASCII characters)
– Maximum Message Length (Selection)
– Maximum Message Length (Other) (1-30 min)
c. Click OK.
3. Enable e-mail notification.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Class of Service ® General.
b. In E-mail Option, select Yes for all Class of Service members that will receive e-mail notifications.
c. Click OK.
4. Specify notification parameters.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Mailbox Settings ® Notification Parameters.
b. Click Edit in E-mail/Text Message Device.
c. Specify the following parameters for Device No. 1, 2, and 3 as required.
– User name
– E-mail Address
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
247
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Only Urgent Messages
Title Order
Title String
Call-back Number [0-9, *, #]
Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
Attach Voice File
Use Mode
Note
For details about these parameters, refer to "20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox
Settings—Notification Parameters" in the PC Programming Manual.
d. Click OK.
Accessing Data Through an IMAP4 E-mail Account
Downloading the IMAP Session Controller Software
When more than 24 users will be accessing data through IMAP4 e-mail accounts, each user must use the
IMAP Session Controller software.
The IMAP Session Controller software can be downloaded from Web Maintenance Console:
1. Log in with a User level account.
The Edit User screen is displayed.
2. Click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click Download for Unified Messaging Plug in to access the download site for the IMAP Session
Controller software.
Note
For details about installing and setting up the IMAP Session Controller software, refer to the Operating
Manual.
Configuring IMAP Accounts
By configuring an IMAP account, subscribers can access the contents of their UM mailboxes through an e-mail
client. All that is necessary is an e-mail client that supports IMAP4.
Once IMAP integration is programmed, users can do the following:
• Listen to voice messages
• Save voice data to their PCs
• Delete voice stored on the PBX
1. Enable IMAP integration.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Class of Service ® General.
b. In Desktop Messaging, select Yes for all Class of Service members that will use IMAP integration.
c. Click OK.
2. Specify the mailbox password.
a. Click Setup ® UM Configuration ® Mailbox Settings ® Mailbox Parameters.
b. Click Edit in Mailbox Password (Message Client).
c. Enter a password in Enter new password.
d. Enter the password again in Confirm new password.
e. Click OK.
f. Click OK.
3. Specify IMAP parameters.
a. Click Setup ® Network Service ® Server Feature ® IMAP4.
b. Specify the following parameters (if required).
– IMAP4 server
248
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice
–
–
–
–
Port Number
IMAP4 over TLS
CAPABILITY command
Authenticated Connection Timeout
Note
For details about these parameters, refer to "27.2.6 Network Service—[2-7] Server
Feature—IMAP4" in the PC Programming Manual.
c. Click OK.
Setting Up the IMAP Account in a Subscriber’s E-mail Client
An account must be set up in each subscriber’s e-mail client for use with the Unified Messaging system. The
setup procedure will vary depending on the e-mail client application used and the configuration of your network.
When adding the account, the settings must be specified as follows:
– The e-mail address will be the subscriber’s existing e-mail address.
– The type of the account must be set to "IMAP".
– The incoming mail server must be set as the IP Address of the PBX where the subscriber’s UM mailbox is
located.
– The user name/ID will be the subscriber’s UM Mailbox Number.
– The password will be the Mailbox Password (Message Client) set in step 2 above.
– A valid SMTP server must be used (i.e. the SMTP server used for existing mail accounts).
The following example setup procedure is for Microsoft Outlook® 2010. Subscribers’ e-mail client setting names
and locations may differ.
1. In Outlook 2010, select File, and then Info.
2. Click the Add Account button.
3. Select Manually configure server settings or additional server types.
4. Select Internet E-mail, and then click Next.
5. Configure the server settings as follows:
User Information
– In Your Name, enter the name of the subscriber. (In the example, "John Smith")
– In E-mail Address, enter the existing mail address of the subscriber. (In the example below,
"j.smith@example.com")
Server Information
– Select IMAP for Account type.
– In Incoming mail server, enter the IP address of the PBX where the subscriber’s UM mailbox is
located. (In the example below, "10.178.19.206")
– In Outgoing mail server (SMTP), enter the SMTP server used for the subscriber’s existing mail
account. (In the example below, "mail.example.com")
Logon Information
– In User Name, enter the subscriber’s Mailbox Number. (In the example below, "407")
– In Password, enter the password for the subscriber specified in Mailbox Password (Message Client).
6. Click Next and then complete the account settings.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
249
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice
Example IMAP Account Settings (Outlook 2010)
250
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
5.11 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes
5.11 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes
Mailboxes can be automatically created and associated with an extension number if these items do not already
exist. There are 2 modes for creating mailboxes. For each specified extension number, a mailbox is
automatically created if one is not already associated with the extension. The results of creating and associating
mailboxes and user profiles with extension numbers are output both to a file and to the syslog. If many
mailboxes must be created or deleted, the amount of time required to complete the task is displayed on the
screen.
Creating mailboxes for all extensions
Note
If a mailbox does not satisfy the conditions for automatic creation, neither will be created for the
corresponding extension.
1. In Web Maintenance Console, click Setup-UM Configuration-Mailbox Settings-Auto Configuration-Create
all mailboxes
2. Click Execute.
• Mailboxes are created with the same number as the extension number.
• However, a mailbox will not be created in any of the following conditions:
a. A mailbox with the same number as the extension number already exists
b. The extension number has only 1 digit
c. The total number of mailboxes, including already existing mailboxes, exceeds 500
Re-creating all mailboxes
IMPORTANT
This procedure deletes all existing voice data, all settings and all prompts from all mailboxes. In
this procedure, voice data (e.g., mailbox voice data, personal greetings) and settings (e.g., the password)
are not deleted from the managers' mailboxes. Be sure to make a backup of any important data beforehand.
If mailbox numbers are changed after mailboxes have been deleted using this feature, even if a backup of
the mailbox settings, voice data (e.g., personal greetings), and messages has been made, the data cannot
be restored. After executing this function, all messages will have been deleted, and it is necessary to
reconfigure all mailbox settings and re-record all prompts.
1. In Web Maintenance Console, click Setup®UM Configuration®Mailbox Settings®Auto
Configuration®Re-create all mailboxes
2. Select the radio button where you want the mailboxes to be created.
– Create mailboxes to the UM group of the PBX where the extensions belong to
– Create mailboxes to the specified UM group (UM Group No. 1 to 16)
3. Click Execute.
• Every type of mailbox, except the manager's mailboxes, will be deleted.
• If there are currently mailboxes in use, you can select whether to delete them forcibly or cancel the
•
•
operation.
All mailboxes will be recreated.
A mailbox will not be created in the following conditions:
– The extension number has only 1 digit
Results of creating mailboxes
The results of creating mailboxes are recorded in a text file. Follow the procedure below to view the file.
1. When automatic configuration completes, click OK on the "Mailbox create result" dialog box.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
251
5.11 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes
2. Mailbox_result.txt is saved to the local PC.
3. The meaning of the status in the generated file is as follows:
User Profile Status
Description
Exist
The user profile already existed and was assigned to the related
mailbox and extension number.
Skipped
The user profile was already assigned to the related mailbox and
extension number.
Mailbox Status
Description
Created
The new mailbox was successfully created.
Failed
The new mailbox was not created.
Assigned
The mailbox already existed, but was successfully assigned to the
related extension number.
Exist
The mailbox was already assigned to the related extension
number.
Skipped
The mailbox already existed, but assigning it to the related
extension number failed.
The start and finish times of the automatic configuration is recorded in the syslog (INFO). For details, refer
to "7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog" in the PC Programming Manual.
252
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 6
Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
This section provides information about stacking
expansion units.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
253
6.1 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
6.1 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
Stacking Expansion Units with the Main Unit allows you to expand the usage of legacy terminals and CO lines.
When expansion units are stacked, the Main Unit will control communication, as well as all IP terminals on the
site.
Note
•
For details about connecting an Expansion Unit to the Main Unit, refer to "4.6.1 EXP-M Card
(KX-NS7130) " in this manual.
• This PBX requires an activation key Expansion Capacity for KX-NS700 (KX-NSF991) to use the
Expansion Unit.
There are 2 ways of stacking Expansion Units.
Case 1
Stacking Expansion Units to the Main Unit (not running).
To stack Expansion Units to a Main Unit which is not running currently, refer to "Procedure for Case 1 and
Case 2".
Case 2
Stacking Expansion Units to the Main Unit (running).
To stack expansion units to a PBX which is already running, refer to "Procedure for Case 1 and Case 2".
Stacking Procedures
The following procedures show how to stack expansion units in each case.
CAUTION
•
•
When installing or removing the optional service cards, the power switch must be turned off.
When installing or removing the optional service cards, do not put pressure on any parts of the mother
board. Doing so may result in damage to the PBX.
Notice
If there is already an Expansion Unit stacked and connected to an EXP-M card installed in the Main Unit,
you can skip shutting down the Main Unit in the following procedures.
Note
•
•
For information about starting the Main Unit for the first time, refer to "4.13 Starting the PBX".
The Expansion Unit will be initialized when started up with an EXP-M card mounted and extension
numbers will be created automatically.
Procedure for Case 1 and Case 2
1. Follow the procedure below for the expansion unit.
a. Make sure the power switch is turned off. If the Main Unit is running, shutdown the Main Unit and then
turn off the power switch.
b. Connect the LAN cable to EXP-S card.
2. Follow the procedure below for the Main Unit.
a. Make sure the power switch is turned off.
b. Insert a EXP-M card into the EXP-M card slot.
c. Connect the LAN cable to EXP-M card.
3. Follow the procedure below for the Main Unit and Expansion Unit.
a. Turn the power switch on.
254
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
6.1 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
Pre-installing stacked Expansion units connected to the EXP-M card
Once an EXP-M card has been added to the physical shelf on the Slot screen, you can pre-install stacked
Expansion units connected to the EXP-M card.
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" in
"5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
2. Click Setup ® PBX Configuration ® Configuration ® Slot.
3. Place the mouse cursor over the EXP-M card, and in the menu that appears, click Pre-Install.
4. Select the Expansion unit connected to connection port 1 of the EXP-M card, and then click the arrow
button.
5. If a second stackable Expansion units is connected to connection port 2 of the EXP-M card, click the arrow
button.
6. Click OK when finished to complete pre-installation.
Programming Expansion unit
To program Expansion Units that are stacked with the Main Unit, use Web Maintenance Console.
To log in to Web Maintenance Console, refer to "Connecting to Web Maintenance Console" in "5.3 Starting
Web Maintenance Console".
For more information about programming Expansion unit, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
255
6.1 Methods of Stacking Expansion Units
256
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 7
Troubleshooting
This section provides information on the PBX and
telephone troubleshooting.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
257
7.1.1 Installation
7.1 Troubleshooting
7.1.1 Installation
PROBLEM
You cannot make/receive
calls via an IP network.
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
•
DSP card malfunction
•
Replace the corresponding card.
•
Mother board
malfunction
•
Replace the mother board (be sure to turn
off the PBX when replacing).
•
Not enough activation
keys
•
Purchase additional activation key codes.
Please consult a certified dealer for
details.
•
Poor connection
•
Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
is used for connection.
Make sure that none of the CAT 5/CAT 5e
cables in use are over 100 m (328 ft) in
length.
Make sure that a straight cable is used for
connection to a switching hub.
•
•
•
Network malfunction
•
•
IP-PTs/SIP phones do not
operate.
•
DSP card malfunction
•
Replace the corresponding card.
•
Mother board
malfunction
•
Replace the mother board (be sure to turn
off the PBX when replacing).
•
Not enough activation
keys
•
Purchase additional activation key codes.
Please consult a certified dealer for
details.
•
IP-PT/SIP phone not
registered
•
Register the corresponding IP-PT/SIP
phone.
•
IP-PT/SIP phone
malfunction
•
Replace the IP-PT/SIP phone.
•
Poor connection
•
Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
is used for connection.
Make sure that none of the CAT 5/CAT 5e
cables in use are over 100 m (328 ft) in
length.
Make sure that a straight cable is used for
connection to a switching hub.
•
•
•
Network malfunction
•
•
258
Installation Manual
Make sure that all network devices in use
are switched on.
Make sure that there is no unwanted
firewall in the IP network.
Make sure that all network devices in use
are switched on.
Make sure that the IP-PT/SIP phone is not
blocked by the firewall or other network
devices.
Document Version 2016-03
7.1.1 Installation
PROBLEM
Extensions (except IP-PT/
SIP phone) do not operate.
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
•
Extension card
malfunction
•
Replace the corresponding card.
•
Poor connection
between the PBX and
the extension
•
Take the extension and plug it into the
same extension port using a short
telephone cord. If the extension works,
then the connection between the PBX and
the extension must be repaired.
•
A telephone with an
A-A1 relay is
connected.
•
•
Make sure that a 2-wire cord is used.
Make sure that the A-A1 relay switch of
the telephone is in "OUT" or "OFF"
position.
•
Extension malfunction
•
Take the extension and plug it into
another extension port that is working. If
the extension does not work, replace the
extension.
•
Restart the PBX (refer to
"7.1.5 Restarting the PBX").
Turn off the power switch, and then turn it
back on.
Turn off the power switch, and then
unplug the PBX. After 5 minutes, plug the
PBX back in, and turn the power switch
back on.
The PBX does not operate
properly.
•
•
Noise on external paging.
•
Induced noise on the
wire between the PBX
and the amplifier.
•
Use a shielded cable as the connection
wire between the PBX and amplifier. A
short shielded cable is recommended.
Distorted external music.
•
Excessive input level
from external music
source.
•
Decrease the output level of the external
music source by using the volume control
on the music source.
The STATUS indicator on
the front of the cabinet turns
on red.
•
A major system error
occurs in the PBX.
•
See the error log using Web Maintenance
Console (refer to "7.1.6 Troubleshooting
by Error Log").
The LINK indicator of the
mother board does not turn
on.
•
Mother board
malfunction
•
Replace the mother board (be sure to turn
off the PBX when replacing).
•
Poor connection.
•
Make sure that an 8-pin twisted pair cable
is used for connection.
Make sure that none of the CAT 5/CAT 5e
cables in use are over 100 m (328 ft) in
length.
Make sure that a straight cable is used for
connection to a switching hub.
•
•
•
Document Version 2016-03
Network malfunction
•
Make sure that all network devices in use
are switched on.
Installation Manual
259
7.1.1 Installation
PROBLEM
The LED of the Expansion
Unit card is not green.
260
Installation Manual
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
The LAN cable is not
connected properly.
•
Check the LAN cable connections.
There was a failure in the
stacking card.
•
Replace the stacking EXP-M card.
Document Version 2016-03
7.1.2 Connection
7.1.2 Connection
Connection between the PBX and an SLT:
Can you dial
an extension?
No
CAUSE
SOLUTION
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.
T
R
T
R
Extension
PBX
Use the correct cord (the
inner 2 wires are for T/R).
If a telephone equipped
with an A-A1 relay is
connected to the PBX, set
the A-A1 relay switch of the
telephone to "OFF".
Connection between the PBX and an SLT that is polarity-sensitive:
CAUSE
SOLUTION
The "T" is connected to the "R".
T
R
Yes
Reverse the connections of
the T/R.
T
R
Extension
PBX
Connection between the central office and the PBX:
CAUSE
SOLUTION
CO line is connected to the T2/T1.
Can you dial
out on a CO
line?
T2
R1
T1
R2
No
CO line
Reconnect the CO line to
the T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the
telephone jack using 2conductor wiring.
PBX
CO line is connected to the T2/R1.
T2
R1
T1
R2
CO line
Document Version 2016-03
PBX
Installation Manual
261
7.1.3 Operation
7.1.3 Operation
Note
For devices connected to a PBX other than the Main Unit, refer to the Troubleshooting for that PBX.
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
•
Cannot set the IP
address, subnet mask
address, and PBX IP
address to the IP-PT.
•
An unusable value is
being set.
•
Set an IP address within the valid range.
IP address of the IP-PT/PBX: "1.0.0.0" to
"223.255.255.255" Subnet mask address:
"0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255" (except
"0.0.0.0" and "255.255.255.255")
•
Cannot register the
IP-PT.
•
The necessary network
parameters are not set
to the IP-PT.
•
When not using the DHCP Server feature
or an external DHCP server, set the IP
address, subnet mask address, and enter
the PBX IP address. If necessary, also
enter the IP address of the default
gateway.
When using the DHCP Server feature or
an external DHCP server, enter the PBX
IP address.
•
•
The IP-PT cannot
connect to the PBX.
•
The wrong IP address,
subnet mask address,
PBX IP address, or
default gateway
address was entered.
•
Check each parameter and enter the
correct value.
•
The Ethernet cable is
not connected
correctly.
•
Check the Ethernet cable connections.
•
The DHCP server is not
active.
•
•
Restart the external DHCP server.
Confirm whether the DHCP Server feature
is enabled.
Disable DHCP and re-enter settings as
appropriate.
•
262
•
Whenever you try to
make calls using a SIP
phone, a busy tone is
heard.
•
The status of the port
that the SIP phone is
connected to is Out of
Service.
•
Change the port status from Out of
Service to In Service using Web
Maintenance Console.
•
The IP-PT does not
ring.
•
The ringer volume is off.
•
Turn on the ringer volume.
•
Originating an outside
call, call transfer, or
conference cannot be
performed.
•
The corresponding
flexible button does not
exist on the PT.
•
Program the flexible button. Refer to
"7.1.1 Fixed Buttons" in the Feature
Manual.
•
The IP address of the
PBX for networking has
been forgotten.
•
You can check the current IP address by
PT Programming.
For details, refer to the PT Programming
[991] in PT Programming Manual.
Installation Manual
-
Document Version 2016-03
7.1.3 Operation
PROBLEM
The status of the port
property of an SLT
extension is FAULT.
PROBABLE CAUSE
•
The telephone is
off-hook.
SOLUTION
Put the telephone on-hook and restart the
PBX.
Note
This solution does not apply to the power
failure ports (ports 1, 2 on the pre-installed
MCSLC4 card).
•
There is a problem in
the wiring.
Disconnect all cabling between the PBX and
SLTs, and restart the PBX.
After restarting, if operation is normal, there is
probably a problem in the wiring or
connection. (For example, there might be a
short circuit in the switchboard or cabling.)
Note
This solution does not apply to the power
failure ports (ports 1, 2 on the pre-installed
MCSLC4 card).
•
Document Version 2016-03
The SLT circuitry is
damaged.
Consult a certified dealer.
Installation Manual
263
7.1.4 Error Messages
7.1.4 Error Messages
When a major system error occurs, an error message is displayed on the IP-PT.
For IP-PTs with a single line display (e.g., KX-NT265), only an error code (i.e., ERR XXXX-XXXX) will be
displayed.
Error Message & IP-PT Activity
ERR 1001-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
Sub CPU malfunction
ERR 1002-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
Sound hardware
malfunction
ERR 1003-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
Flash memory malfunction
ERR 1004-XXXX
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
PHY (network control IC)
error
ERR 1005-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
SDRAM error
ERR 1006-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
SRAM error
ERR 1007-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
Sub CPU malfunction for
Self Labeling
ERR 1051-0000
SOFTWARE ERROR
Displays error and stops operating.
•
ERR 2001-XXXX
SYSTEM ERROR
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
ERR 2002-0000
POOR LAN CONNECTION
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
ERR 2003-0000
POOR LAN CONNECTION
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
264
Probable Cause
Installation Manual
Solution
•
Repair or replace the
IP-PT.
PBX software version error
•
Consult your network
administrator.
•
Unexpected error
•
If this error is displayed
frequently, repair or
replace the IP-PT.
•
Transmission error
•
Check with the network
administrator whether
there is a problem with the
LAN.
If this error is displayed
frequently, repair or
replace the IP-PT.
•
Document Version 2016-03
7.1.4 Error Messages
Error Message & IP-PT Activity
Probable Cause
ERR 2004-0000
UNREGISTERED TO SERVER
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
•
IP-PT not registered
ERR 2005-0000
NO MORE CONNECTIONS
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
•
Connection refused by the
PBX
ERR 2006-XXXX
DHCP SERVER REJECTION
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
•
ERR 2007-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
Solution
•
Check the registration
status of the IP-PT.
IP address lease time from
DHCP server has expired
IP address lease renewal
was refused by DHCP
server
•
Consult your network
administrator.
•
Communication error with
sub CPU
•
If this error is displayed
frequently, repair or
replace the IP-PT.
ERR 2008-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
•
Sound hardware control
error
ERR 2009-XXXX
MGCP SERVER REJECTION
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
•
Error information from the
PBX (MGCP server)
•
Consult your network
administrator.
ERR 2010-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Resets and displays error for 5 seconds
while starting up.
•
Communication error with
sub CPU for Self Labeling
•
If this error is displayed
frequently, repair or
replace the IP-PT.
ERR 3001-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error until reset the IP-PT.
•
Communication error with
sub CPU
ERR 3002-0000
HARDWARE ERROR
Displays error until reset the IP-PT.
•
Sound hardware control
error
ERR 3003-XXXX
DHCP SERVER NOT FOUND
Displays error until reset the IP-PT.
•
IP address lease renewal
was refused by DHCP
server
•
Consult your network
administrator.
ERR 3100-0000
BLUETOOTH ERROR
Resets the Bluetooth wireless headset.
•
Bluetooth hardware error
•
Repair or replace the
Bluetooth wireless
headset.
Document Version 2016-03
•
Installation Manual
265
7.1.5 Restarting the PBX
7.1.5 Restarting the PBX
If the PBX does not operate properly, restart the PBX using Web Maintenance Console. Before restarting the
PBX, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
Note
•
•
•
When the System Mode Switch is set to "NORMAL", restarting the PBX causes the following:
– Camp-on is cleared.
– Calls on hold are terminated.
– Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.
– Calls in progress are terminated.
– Call park is cleared.
Other data stored in memory, except the above, are not cleared.
Be aware that restarting the PBX with the System Mode Switch in the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position
clears all data stored in the PBX. Do not perform this operation unless you intend to delete all data
from the PBX.
When the PBX is set to obtain IP addressing information automatically, and the PBX is not able to
obtain appropriate IP addressing information from an external DHCP server, the PBX starts up with its
default IP addresses and the STATUS indicator on the front of the cabinet turns red. For the default IP
addresses, refer to "5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console".
Operation
If the PBX does not operate properly:
1. Slide the System Mode Switch to the "NORMAL" position.
System Mode Switch
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start the Web Maintenance Console.
Log in using the Installer level account.
On the Home screen, click Maintenance ® System Control ® System Reset ® System Reset.
Follow the prompts.
Restarting the PBX will start.
Note
•
266
When the power switch is turned on, or when the PBX recovers from a power failure, the PBX will
restart. The time required to restart depends on the number of connected extensions.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
7.1.5 Restarting the PBX
Example:
PBX
KX-NS700
•
Extensions
128 KX-UT series SIP phones
Estimated Time for Starting Up
more than 5 minutes
PBX functions cannot be used until restarting is complete. The use of a UPS is recommended; even
a momentary power failure can result in a long delay as the PBX restarts, requiring the time as shown
above.
To reset the system at a preset time:
1. Confirm that the System Mode Switch is in the "NORMAL" position.
2. Start the Web Maintenance Console.
3. Log in using the Installer level account.
4. On the Home screen, click Maintenance ® System Control ® System Reset ® Timed Reset.
5. Set the Site, Reset Mode, and Reset Time for the system reset.
For details about the settings, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
6. Click Apply or OK to set the system reset.
The PBX will restart at the specified time.
PC Programming Manual References
5.3 System Control—System Reset
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
267
7.1.6 Troubleshooting by Error Log
7.1.6 Troubleshooting by Error Log
When a major system error occurs in the PBX, the STATUS indicator on the front of the cabinet turns red, and
the system logs the error information.
Error Log Display Format
Below is the display format of the error log. For information about how to view the error log using Web
Maintenance Console, refer to "7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log" in the PC Programming Manual.
Example: Web Maintenance Console
3
7
1
2
4
5
6
Example: Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
01/01/10 01:00AM MJ ALM #014 00 10000 FAN Alarm
01/01/10 01:39AM MN ALM #091 00 10000 PT connection over
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Item
1
Date
The date of the error detection.
2
Time
The time of the error detection.
3
Level
4
268
Description
Error Code
Installation Manual
Minor (MN ALM)
Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system
operation.
Major (MJ ALM)
Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole
system, or result in system failure.
The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX. For details about
the error code, refer to item 7 in this table.
Document Version 2016-03
7.1.6 Troubleshooting by Error Log
Item
5
Sub Code
Description
SMDR:
The 8-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (BBWXYYZZ).
Web Maintenance Console:
The 6-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZ).
For details about the contents of error sub codes, refer to
"7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log" in the PC Programming
Manual.
6
Error Message
A description of the error.
7
Log Information
Clicking this button displays a list of errors and solutions in PDF
format, as shown below.
[Sample] List of Errors and Solutions
For each error code, the error message, probable cause, and solutions are explained.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
269
7.1.6 Troubleshooting by Error Log
270
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 8
Networking Information
This section provides information about topics such as
using the PBX in a VoIP network, and the TCP ports
used by the PBX.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
271
8.1.1 Using a VoIP Network with the PBX
8.1 Information about Using an IP Network
This section explains common IP network information necessary for setting up QSIG networks.
8.1.1 Using a VoIP Network with the PBX
This PBX supports Panasonic KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series, and KX-NT265 IP proprietary telephones
(IP-PTs), Panasonic IP softphones, and SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) phones (hardphones and softphones)
for communication on a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) network. These IP telephones can be used as
extensions of the PBX when the local office LAN is connected to other LANs at different locations.
This PBX also enables VoIP communication with PBXs installed at different locations. Since the communication
does not take place over conventional telephone network, the high cost of long distance communication is
virtually eliminated.
To establish a VoIP network, the virtual cards are used according the requirement of the network. For details
about virtual cards, see "4.4 Virtual Cards".
The following diagrams illustrate VoIP network with (i) a remote office LAN and (ii) another PBX installed at
different location.
Note
Panasonic IP Cell Station (IP-CS) units are also supported by this PBX for communication on a VoIP
network. For details, refer to the Installation Guide for the IP-CS.
(i) Connection Outline of VoIP Network with Remote Office LAN
Local Office LAN
SIP Phone
Extn. 102
Remote Office LAN
IP Softphone
Extn. 103
IP-PT
Extn. 101
IP Softphone
Extn. 105
Switching
Hub
SIP Phone
Extn. 106
PBX with
V-IPEXT32 card/
V-SIPEXT32 card
IP-PT
Extn. 104
Router
Switching
Hub
DHCP Server
Router
Private
IP Network
272
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.1.1 Using a VoIP Network with the PBX
(ii) Connection Outline of VoIP Network with PBX in Other Network
Router
Headquarters
PBX with
V-IPGW16 card
Switching Hub
Private IP Network
Router
PBX with
V-IPGW16 card
Switching Hub
Branch
Network Parameters
You will need to have the following IP addressing and QoS information to establish VoIP communication on
your network. This information is typically supplied by a network administrator.
Consult your network administrator for specific values.
Parameter
Description
IP telephone IP Address
Identifies the location of IP telephones on the network. Each IP
telephone must have a unique IP address.
Subnet Mask Address
Defines which digits of an IP address are used for the network
address and the host address at each network location. The IP
addresses of the IP telephones and the PBX must fall within the same
subnet as that of the default gateway (e.g., router) of the LAN.
Default Gateway Address
Identifies the IP address of the primary gateway (typically a router or
similar device) that exchanges IP packets with the other gateways on
the VoIP network.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
273
8.1.1 Using a VoIP Network with the PBX
Parameter
Description
PBX IP Address
Identifies the location of the PBX in the network during VoIP
communications.
VLAN ID
Identifies the ID of the logical segment within the corporate LAN,
through which voice packets from IP telephones travel. For details,
refer to "8.1.3 VLAN (Virtual LAN)".
DiffServ (DS)
Identifies the value for the DS field in the header of IP packets, which
determines the priority given to packets traveling from IP telephones.
For details, refer to "5.7.4 Setting Diffserv Parameters".
Types of IP Network
The speech quality depends on the type of IP network in use. Managed IP networks provide better speech
quality compared to unmanaged networks such as satellite communications, where quality of service cannot
be guaranteed.
Examples of recommended IP networks
• Digital Leased Line
• IP-VPN (Virtual Private Network)
• Frame Relay
Not recommended
• Satellite communications (Very Small Aperture
Terminal system [VSAT], etc.)
Note
•
•
274
Peer-to-peer calls between IP telephones installed at different locations may not be possible if packet
communication cannot be established between the respective networks. In this case, you need to
configure the network settings (e.g., a VPN router when using an IP-VPN) to establish packet
communication.
Unlike an IP-VPN, which is set up over a network provider’s own IP network, an Internet VPN is set up
over the Internet. Internet VPNs are not recommended for VoIP communication because transmission
delays and loss of data are likely to occur.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server
8.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Server
To establish communication over a VoIP network, IP addresses must be assigned to IP telephones and the
PBX to identify their locations on the network. While these addresses can be assigned manually, it is also
possible to use a DHCP server to automatically assign IP address information. The PBX has a DHCP Server
feature. Therefore, the PBX can act as a DHCP server or DHCP client depending on its settings. When the
PBX’s DHCP Server feature is enabled, it allows you to centrally manage and automate the assignment of IP
addresses with Web Maintenance Console. For details, refer to " DHCP Server" in the PC Programming
Manual.
When the mother board is
connected to the network
1 Request IP address
information
PBX
(DHCP Server
feature enabled)
2 Assign IP address
information to the
DSP card
When an IP telephone is
connected to the network
3 Request IP address
information
DSP Card
4 Assign IP address
information to an IP
telephone
IP Telephone
Note
•
•
•
•
The DHCP Server feature is disabled by default. To enable the feature, refer to "5.4.2 Enabling the
DHCP Server Feature".
An IP telephone and the mother board/DSP card cannot request IP addresses from a DHCP server on
another LAN (connected through an IP network). They can only receive IP addresses from a DHCP
server on the same LAN. Therefore, when IP telephones are located on several LANs, a DHCP server
is required on each LAN. If a DHCP server is not present on the LAN, IP addresses for IP telephones
and the mother board/DSP cards on that LAN must be assigned manually.
When the PBX has been set to act as a DHCP client, use an external DHCP server to assign IP address
information automatically.
When the PBX is set as the DHCP client and cannot receive appropriate IP addressing information
from an external DHCP server, the PBX keeps using the previous effective IP addressing information
and checks whether any overlapping of IP addresses exists. If the IP address of the PBX overlaps with
another IP address, the PBX displays a warning to encourage changing the IP address of the PBX.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
275
8.1.3 VLAN (Virtual LAN)
8.1.3 VLAN (Virtual LAN)
VLANs are logical segments within a corporate LAN. By assigning VLAN settings to IP telephones, it is possible
to separate the packets transmitted by an IP telephone according to the type of data and specify which VLAN
each data type will be sent over. This allows you to avoid generating unnecessary network traffic on each
segment and to reduce the load on the network. As a consequence, speech quality can be assured. Therefore,
we recommend using the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication effectively.
Some IP telephones (e.g., KX-NT300 series) are equipped with 2 ports, primary and secondary, for packet
communication. Allocating these ports to different VLANs enables you to split the paths for packets depending
on whether the packet contains voice signals or data.
VLAN settings (VLAN ID and VLAN priority) for the primary port affect voice data transmitted by the IP
telephone, whereas VLAN settings for the secondary port apply to data transmitted by a PC connected to the
IP telephone. When sending packets, the IP telephone can attach information on which VLAN the packets are
to be transmitted over (VLAN Tagging). The switching hub that receives these packets reads the VLAN
information and sends the packets over the appropriate VLAN. This helps to ensure bandwidth for IP telephone
voice transmissions.
In this way, an IP telephone with 2 ports can transmit voice packets from the primary port with higher priority
than other packets from the secondary port.
Notice
The PBX’s LAN port does not support VLAN tagging. Therefore, connect the PBX’s LAN port to a port of
the switching hub that is set to "Untagged", and the IP telephone to a port set to "Trunk", to allow VLAN
tagging. Consult your network administrator for details.
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
Segment for Voice Data
Segment for Other Data
VLAN-capable Switching Hub
VLAN 1
VLAN 2
VLAN 1
Untagged
VLAN 2
PBX
VLAN 2
VLAN 1
Voice Packet
PC
Other Packet
Other Packet
IP Telephone with 2 ports
PC
Primary
276
Installation Manual
Secondary
Document Version 2016-03
8.1.5 Voice Activity Detection (VAD)
Note
•
•
•
•
•
•
This VLAN feature complies with IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.1Q.
The PBX receives VLAN settings only from the connected switching hub. Therefore, VLAN settings for
the PBX must be assigned at the switching hub.
When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the main unit is connected to a layer 2
switch that is IEEE 802.1Q compliant, and that is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of the
switching hub to which the card is connected must be set to "Untagged". Consult your network
administrator for details.
When using the VLAN feature on the network, make sure that the switching hub to be connected is
IEEE 802.1Q compliant and is configured for VLANs. In addition, the port of a switching hub that the
IP telephone is connected to must be set to "Trunk" port, to allow VLAN tagging. Consult your network
administrator for details.
Some PC LAN cards allow VLAN settings to be assigned. However, when using a PC connected to an
IP telephone with 2 ports, the VLAN settings for PC communications must be assigned only to the
secondary port of the IP telephone. Any VLAN settings assigned to the PC LAN card must be disabled.
These settings can usually be identified by "802.1Q", "802.1p", or "VLAN" in their name.
If you are using an IP telephone with a primary port only (e.g., KX-NT265), a PC cannot be connected
to the IP telephone.
8.1.4 Jitter Buffer
When voice signals are packetized and transmitted, individual packets can take different paths through the
network and arrive at the destination at varied timings. This is referred to as "jitter", and it can cause degradation
in speech quality. To compensate for jitter problems, the "jitter buffer" accumulates the packets temporarily for
processing.
To set the size of the jitter buffer, refer to "9.2.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System
Property—Site—VoIP-DSP Options" in the PC Programming Manual.
8.1.5 Voice Activity Detection (VAD)
VAD conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network. This feature can be enabled or disabled for codec G.711.
To configure the VAD feature, refer to the appropriate section in the PC Programming Manual.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
277
8.1.6 Network Configuration
8.1.6 Network Configuration
You must evaluate the structure of the existing network to see if a VoIP network can be implemented. Below
are the points that should be evaluated.
Is the IP network a managed network?
A VoIP network should be implemented on a managed IP network such as Frame Relay, Leased Line, or
IP-VPN (Virtual Private Network).
An unmanaged network, such as the Internet (including an Internet VPN), cannot be used to employ a VoIP
network because delays and loss in data transmission can cause huge degradation in speech quality.
Is it possible to have static IP addressing?
IP telephones on the network always perform VoIP communications through the PBX. Therefore, the PBX
must be assigned static IP addresses, which must be programmed to each IP telephone on the network.
Note
When the DHCP Server feature is disabled and external DHCP servers are not used, static IP addressing
must also be enabled for all IP telephones.
Does only a single router provide access to the IP network?
In a dual network, 2 routers provide access to the IP network as shown in the diagram below. However, only
one router can be used as an access point to the network.
Therefore, in the diagram below, if router A, whose IP address is assigned as the default gateway IP address
of the PBX and the IP telephones, fails, VoIP communications are no longer possible; they are not able to
switch their default gateway from router A to router B to access the IP network.
IP Network
Router A
Default gateway of
the PBX: Router A
278
Installation Manual
Router B
Default gateway of
the IP Telephone:
Router A
Document Version 2016-03
8.1.6 Network Configuration
How is the PBX connected to remote extensions?
When the PBX is connected to a remote extensions via public IP network without using IP-VPN, address
translation techniques (e.g., NAT/NAPT) are used. These methods prevent VoIP communications from being
carried out effectively. In such cases, the use of an SBC will avoid this problem.
Note
•
•
An SBC is not required for:
– Connections via a Wide Area Ethernet or LAN
– Connections via IP-VPN
An SBC is required for:
– Connections via a public IP network
Connection via Wide Area Ethernet or LAN
Local IP Address
Domain
Connection via IP-VPN
Local IP Address
Domain
Switching Hub
Router
Global IP Address
Domain
Wide Area
Ethernet/
LAN
IP-VPN
Switching Hub
Local IP Address
Domain
Document Version 2016-03
Router
Installation Manual
279
8.1.6 Network Configuration
Connection via Public IP Network
Local IP Address
Domain
SBC
Router
Global IP Address
Domain
Public
IP Network
Local IP Address
Domain
280
Installation Manual
Router
Document Version 2016-03
8.1.6 Network Configuration
Are the network devices located appropriately for effective VoIP
communications?
Transmission delays can cause pauses and loss in VoIP communications. The more network devices (e.g.,
routers and switching hubs) there are between the PBX and IP telephones or the IP network interface, the
longer the transmission delays. This is because a certain amount of delay is inevitable when packets go through
each network device.
To prevent unnecessary delays, it is recommended to connect the PBX as close to the IP telephones and the
IP network interface as possible so that the number of the network devices is kept to a minimum.
IP Network
Router
Router
Switching
Hub
Switching
Hub
Switching
Hub
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
281
8.1.7 Network Devices
8.1.7 Network Devices
You must evaluate the network devices that are used in the existing network to see if a VoIP network can be
implemented. Below are the points that should be evaluated.
Can the firewall pass packets appropriately?
If the VoIP network contains a firewall, the firewall must be configured appropriately to allow VoIP packets to
pass through the network without being blocked by filtering. For details about the protocols and port numbers
that the PBX uses for VoIP communication, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
The ports for which you need to configure the firewall may vary depending on the network conditions.
For more information, consult your network administrator.
Are layer 2 or higher switches used?
Use of repeater hubs can increase the network load, and therefore may result in degradation in speech quality.
To ensure high speech quality, use only layer 2 or higher switches. Use of layer 2 or higher switches is also
strongly recommended for connecting IP telephones.
Note
Note that the port of the switching hub that connects to the mother board should be set to operate under
"Auto Negotiation" mode.
Are Category 5 (CAT 5) or higher cables used for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX?
When connecting network devices, make sure to use CAT 5 or higher cables for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
connection. If other types of cables are used, communication may not be carried out normally.
282
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.1.8 QoS (Quality of Service)
8.1.8 QoS (Quality of Service)
Some routers permit the configuration of priority control features. This allows the router to give higher priority
to voice packets and lower the rate of loss and delays during transmissions, hence improving speech quality.
It is strongly recommended that you use this feature, especially in networks where traffic is heavy.
Typically, a router identifies what packets to pass in priority by checking the value in the ToS field of the header
of IP packets. The V-IPGW16 card has the ability to set the ToS field of outgoing voice packets. When the card
is appropriately configured, the router can give voice packets from the card higher priority.
Consult your network administrator when setting the ToS field, as the setting value must conform to the
router’s specifications.
Note
•
•
Some switches also permit the configuration of priority control features. For more information, consult
your network administrator.
To adjust the value in the ToS field, refer to "9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW" in the PC Programming Manual.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
283
8.1.9 Network Time Protocol (NTP)
8.1.9 Network Time Protocol (NTP)
The PBX can be configured to contact an NTP server to receive and update its time setting automatically.
KX-UT series SIP phones can receive and update their time setting either through the PBX or by contacting
an NTP server directly.
For a SIP phone to receive and update its time setting via the PBX, the NTP server feature must be enabled.
To enable this feature refer to "27.2.4 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—NTP" in the PC Programming
Manual.
If the NTP server feature is enabled:
• Case 1: An NTP server is specified in Web Maintenance Console.
– The SIP phones use the specified IP address and contact the NTP server directly.
• Case 2: An NTP server is not specified in Web Maintenance Console.
– The SIP phones use the IP address of the PBX as their NTP server.
(The PBX acts as an NTP server for the SIP phones.)
To specify the IP address of the NTP server, refer to "10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date &
Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving" in the PC Programming Manual.
If the NTP server feature is disabled, the SIP phones use their own time settings.
284
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.2.1 One-Look Network with NS-Net
8.2 Information about Using a One-look Network
This section gives an overview of using the PBX in One-look networks.
8.2.1 One-Look Network with NS-Net
*1
Multiple KX-NS series PBXs can be connected as a distributed networked system using a private IP network.
The networked system is called a One-look network. In a One-look network, a KX-NS1000 PBX serves as the
Master unit, which controls the other PBXs, known as Slave units.
The Slave units share setup information and resources controlled by the Master unit. A One-look network is
useful when the network will consist only of KX-NS series PBXs and a private IP network is feasible.
A considerable amount of setup is done automatically by the PBXs, so setup and maintenance is much simpler
than other types of networks, such as a TIE line network. All units can be programmed from one location.
Resource sharing allows users to interact as if they were all connected to one PBX, which eliminates the need
to manage information such as PBX access codes.
*1
NS-Net is a network protocol only used for Panasonic products.
Slave Units
(Up to 15 Units)
KX-NS1000
Master Unit
KX-NS1000
IP Network
.....
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Only a KX-NS1000 can serve as a Master unit or Slave unit. Other KX-NS series PBXs can serve only as
Slave units.
At least one DSP card must be installed in this PBX when it is used as a Slave unit. For details of DSP
cards, refer to "4.3.3 DSP Cards".
The following features are not available when this PBX is used as a Slave unit.
– SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
– PT system programming
– ISDN/Analog remote maintenance
The following resources will be reduced when this PBX is used as a Slave unit.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
285
8.2.1 One-Look Network with NS-Net
Feature
SMDR Call Storage
Standalone operation
One-look network
40,000 calls
1000 calls
Networking Notes
•
•
It is recommended that One-look networks be located in one country/area. Operation cannot be guaranteed
for One-look networks that span multiple countries/areas.
For information about compatible equipment in your country/area when the PBX is used as Slave unit,
consult your dealer.
References
For details about programming and using One-look network, refer to the appropriate documentation for the
KX-NS1000.
286
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.3.1 Avoid Multiple IP Networks
8.3 H.323 CO Lines
This section explains information that is necessary for setting up an H.323 QSIG network over an IP network.
8.3.1 Avoid Multiple IP Networks
A huge degradation in speech quality will be produced when calls are made through multiple IP networks as
shown below; therefore, it is recommended that you avoid establishing a VoIP network in this fashion.
PSTN/
QSIG, etc.
IP Network 1
IP Network 1
Document Version 2016-03
IP Network 2
IP Network 2
Installation Manual
287
8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment
8.3.2 Gatekeeper
The following are the general functions of a gatekeeper:
• Dialed number-to-IP address translation
• Authentication
• Bandwidth control
The gatekeeper provides these network management functions to registered clients. To register with the
gatekeeper, you need to configure the V-IPGW16 card to use the gatekeeper and program the GK Settings
table through system programming. For details, refer to "9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW— Gatekeeper Available" and "9.11.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-IPGW—GK Settings" in the PC Programming
Manual. After programming, the V-IPGW16 card attempts to register with the gatekeeper using registration
information such as the IP address of the mother board, and destination telephone numbers specified in the
GK Settings table.
Note
•
•
For more information about gatekeeper functions, consult the documentation of the gatekeeper.
When using a gatekeeper, make sure to choose a compatible model. For more information about
gatekeeper compatibility with the V-IPGW16 card, consult a certified dealer.
8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment
When using the IP telephones and V-IPGW16 card, you must ensure that the IP network in use has enough
bandwidth to support VoIP communications. If the amount of bandwidth required for VoIP communications is
more than the network can accommodate, speech quality will be compromised. In addition, there may be an
adverse effect on the performance of other applications (e.g., e-mail or Web applications) that use the same
network. Therefore, care must be taken when assessing bandwidth requirements.
Inform your network administrator of the required bandwidth, and make sure that the network can support VoIP
communications even under conditions of maximum network traffic.
Bandwidth Assessment for IP Extension Card
Required Bandwidth per IP Telephone for a Call
The required bandwidth depends on what combination of codecs and packet sending intervals is used. Keep
in mind the following points about the type of codecs and packet sending intervals, in terms of speech quality:
• The speech quality of the codecs varies as follows: (High) G.722, G.711, G.729A (Low)*1
• The shorter the packet sending interval, the higher the speech quality.
• The higher the speech quality the IP telephones provide, the more bandwidth the IP telephones require.
*1
When the preferred codec of each party differs, the call will be established using the lower codec. For example, if the caller prefers
G.711 while the called party prefers G.729A, the call will be established using G.729A.
Packet Sending Interval
Codec
*1
288
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
60 ms
G.722*1/G.711
87.2 kbps
79.5 kbps
—
—
G.729A
31.2 kbps
23.5 kbps
19.6 kbps
15.7 kbps
G.722 is only available for calls between KX-NT300 series IP-PTs, KX-NT500 series IP-PTs, and some SIP phones that support this
codec during peer-to-peer communication. For details, refer to "15.1.6 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection" in the Feature Manual.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment
Required Bandwidth for Each IP Extension Card
To allow all IP telephones to make calls simultaneously, it is necessary to keep available the bandwidth required
by an IP extension card with the maximum number of IP telephones connected.
Provided below is the formula to calculate the amount of bandwidth required for each IP extension card.
When using the V-IPEXT32/V-SIPEXT32 card:
Required Bandwidth = (Required Bandwidth per IP telephone ´ 32)
Bandwidth Assessment for V-IPGW16 Card
Required Bandwidth for One VoIP Channel
The required bandwidth depends on what combination of codecs and packet sending intervals is used. Keep
in mind the following points about the type of codec and packet sending interval, in terms of the speech quality:
• The speech quality of the G.711 codec is higher than that of the G.729A codec.
• The shorter the packet sending interval, the higher the speech quality.
• The higher the speech quality the V-IPGW16 card provides, the more bandwidth the card requires.
Via LAN
Packet Sending Interval
Codec
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
60 ms
90 ms
G.711
87.2 kbps
79.5 kbps
75.6 kbps
71.7 kbps
—
G.729A
31.2 kbps
23.5 kbps
19.6 kbps
15.7 kbps
—
Via WAN (PPP: Point-to-Point Protocol)
Packet Sending Interval
Codec
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
60 ms
90 ms
G.711
84 kbps
77.3 kbps
74 kbps
70.7 kbps
—
G.729A
28 kbps
21 kbps
18 kbps
14.7 kbps
—
Bandwidth Calculation
Provided below is the formula to find out the amount of bandwidth required for VoIP communications:
Required Bandwidth
= (No. of Fax Machines ´ Required Bandwidth for the G.711 codec) +
[(16 - No. of Fax Machines) ´ Required Bandwidth for Voice Communication]
Example
Consider the following case as an example:
• Communication: via LAN
• No. of Fax Machines: 2
• G.711 Packet Sending Interval: 20 ms (requiring 87.2 kbps per channel)
• G.729A Packet Sending Interval for Voice Communication: 20 ms (requiring 31.2 kbps per channel)
In this case, the required bandwidth will be as follows:
Required Bandwidth
= (2 ´ 87.2) + [(16 - 2) ´ 31.2]
= 611.2 (kbps)
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
289
8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment
Therefore, inform your network administrator and make sure that the network can support a bandwidth of
611.2 kbps even when the network is under conditions of maximum traffic.
Note
It is recommended that all cards on a VoIP network have the same packet sending interval.
Additional Information
As described above, it is possible to control the required bandwidth by selecting a certain combination of codec
and packet sending interval. However, it is also possible to control required bandwidth by limiting the number
of available virtual VoIP channels.
The V-IPGW16 card supports a total of 8 ports, each having 2 separate channels. By disabling some of the
ports, you can reduce the bandwidth required for VoIP communications.
To limit the number of VoIP channels:
Set the status of the ports you wish to disable (starting from the highest-numbered port) to OUS.
For example, if you wish to use only 10 of the available 16 virtual VoIP channels (i.e., disable 6 channels), set
ports 8, 7, and 6 to OUS as shown below:
In this case, the equation for bandwidth calculation, based on the previous example, will change as follows:
Required Bandwidth
= (No. of Fax Machines ´ Required Bandwidth for the G.711 codec) +
[(10 - No. of Fax Machines) ´ Required Bandwidth for Voice Communication]
= (2 ´ 87.2) + [(10 - 2) ´ 31.2]
= 424 (kbps)
290
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.3.4 Virtual VoIP Gateway Card Specifications
8.3.4 Virtual VoIP Gateway Card Specifications
For details about the RFCs and protocols for the V-IPGW16 card, refer to the following specifications.
ITU-T
H.323
H.225.0
H.245
Codecs
G.711 (a-law and µ-law)
G.729A
Voice Operations
Echo Cancellation (48 ms)
Jitter Buffer (200 ms)
VAD (Voice Activity Detection)*1
PLC (Packet Loss Concealment)
DTMF Relay
Inband/Outband (RFC2833)/Outband (H.245)
Fax Relay
G.711 Inband/T.38
Protocol/Function
RTP
RTCP
*1
VAD is only available for codec G.711.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
291
8.4.1 IP Telephony Service
8.4 SIP CO Lines
This section provides information on using SIP CO lines with the PBX.
8.4.1 IP Telephony Service
The Virtual 16-Channel SIP CO Line Card (V-SIPGW16) is a virtual CO line card which is designed to be easily
integrated into an Internet Telephony Service provided by an ITSP (Internet Telephony Service Provider).
As a major SIP Provider, an ITSP provides its telephony service partly through the conventional telephone
network (e.g., ISDN and Mobile), which is fee-based. An ISP (Internet Service Provider), another major SIP
Provider, does not provide telephone connection itself. However, providing its users with Internet access, an
ISP provides voice communication on the Internet for free. In this way, with VoIP technology based on the SIP
protocol, the cost of voice communication can be much cheaper than conventional telephone networks. A
maximum of 4 V-SIPGW16 cards can be installed to the virtual slots of the PBX. The channel capacity of the
card allows users to connect to up to 32 different ISP/ITSPs.
V-SIPGW16 Connection Outline
The following diagram illustrates a simple VoIP network connecting the V-SIPGW16 card to the Internet.
WAN (Wide Area Network)
Internet
ITSP
Local
Telephone
ISP
LAN
(Local Area Network)
Router
Switching
Hub
PC
IP-PT
PBX with
V-SIPGW16 Card
Requirements for Internet Telephony Service
• You need to subscribe with an ISP for Internet connection.
292
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.4.1 IP Telephony Service
•
You need to subscribe with an ITSP for telephone connection. The ISP and ITSP may be part of the same
company.
Note
•
•
VoIP communication using the V-SIPGW16 card may deteriorate depending on the ITSP being used.
VoIP communication using the V-SIPGW16 card may deteriorate depending on the network conditions.
DNS (Domain Name System)
A DNS server normally provides the name resolution service for your PC. As domain names are alphabetic,
they are easier to remember. The Internet, however, is based on IP addresses. Therefore, every time a domain
name is used, a DNS server must translate the name into the corresponding IP address, and vice versa. For
example, the domain name www.example.com may be translated to 192.0.34.166. If one DNS server does
not know how to translate a particular domain name, it asks another one, and so on, until the correct IP address
is returned.
NAT Traversal
When NAT/NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) is enabled, the router translates a local IP address from
the PBX into a global IP address. However, the router with NAT enabled does not translate local IP addresses
stored in SIP messages into global IP addresses.
Therefore, the address which the SIP Server recognizes as the destination IP address to reply to is actually
the local IP address of the PBX, not the global IP address of the router. Therefore, if the SIP Server receives
a SIP message from the PBX and sends a message back to the PBX using the address stored in the SIP
message, the packet information will not reach the PBX.
STUN Servers function to solve the global IP address problem under certain NAT conditions, for example, in
case of full duplex communication. A STUN Server, used alongside the SIP Server, finds out the global IP
address of the router with NAT enabled. With the STUN feature enabled, the packet information sent by the
SIP Server is able to "traverse" NAT and reach the PBX.
The settings can be configured to specify whether to enable the NAT Traversal feature for each ISP/ITSP. In
addition, the NAT Traversal method can be selected from "STUN" and "Fixed IP Address". For details, refer
to "9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Shelf Property—V-SIPGW" in the PC Programming
Manual.
The V-SIPGW16 card may require the NAT Traversal feature to be enabled to connect to the WAN via a router.
The following diagram illustrates how VoIP communication is enabled between the V-SIPGW16 card and the
SIP Server (SIP Receiver) via a router with NAT enabled.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
293
8.4.1 IP Telephony Service
WAN
Internet
STUN
STUN
Server
Fixed IP
I Address
SIP
SI
Server
SI
SIP
Server
ISP/ITSP
ISP/ITS
ISP/ITSP
ISP/ITS
LAN
Router
(NAT enabled)
Switching
Hub
PC
IP-PT
PBX with
V-SIPGW16 Card
Note
•
•
294
If an ISP/ITSP uses a device such as SBC (Session Border Controller), you may not have to enable
the NAT Traversal feature.
A STUN Server is supplied by an ISP/ITSP, and not included with the PBX.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.4.4 Bandwidth Requirements
8.4.2 SIP Requirements
Port Requirements
Required Ports for Each Channel
When configuring a router with NAT enabled, you need to secure a certain number of ports for each SIP and
RTP/RTCP channel. For RTP/RTCP, the number of required ports is double the number of activated SIP CO
lines (Ch). For SIP signaling, the number of required ports is always one regardless of the number of activated
SIP CO lines (Ch).
<Example>
If 4 SIP CO line channels are activated, you need the following number of ports:
Protocol Type
Required Port
RTP
4
RTCP
4
SIP
1
Total
9
Firewall Requirements
If the VoIP network contains a firewall, the firewall must be configured appropriately to allow VoIP packets to
pass through the network without being blocked by filtering. For the protocols and port numbers that the PBX
uses for VoIP communication, refer to "8.6 Port Security".
The ports for which you need to configure the firewall may vary depending on the network conditions.
For more information, consult your network administrator.
8.4.3 Router Requirements
•
Port Forwarding:
It may be necessary to set the NAT router so that it forwards the incoming packets to the IP address of the
V-SIPGW16 card if all of the following conditions are met:
– the PBX uses a STUN server;
– a V-SIPGW16 card is located under a NAT router;
– incoming packets are routed to a SIP Client port or NAT Voice (RTP) UDP port indicated in "8.6 Port
Security".
•
SIP-NAT Feature:
When a V-SIPGW16 card is located under a NAT router that supports the SIP-NAT feature*1, it is
recommended to disable this feature.
*1
When NAT is enabled, the router translates the IP address stored in the IP header and the port number stored in the UDP header.
When SIP-NAT is enabled, the router also translates the IP address and port number stored in SIP messages.
8.4.4 Bandwidth Requirements
When using the V-SIPGW16 card, you must ensure that the WAN has enough bandwidth to support VoIP
communications. Refer to the table below and ensure that the sum of the required bandwidth for each channel
is smaller than the amount the WAN (e.g., ADSL network) can provide.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
295
8.4.4 Bandwidth Requirements
Note that the amount in the table is only a guide. Subscribe to a network that has enough bandwidth. If the
amount of bandwidth required for VoIP communications is larger than what the network can accommodate,
speech quality will be compromised.
Required Bandwidth for Each Channel
The required bandwidth depends on what combination of codecs and packet sending interval is used. Keep
in mind the following points about the type of codec and packet sending interval, in terms of the speech quality:
• The speech quality of the codecs varies as follows: G.711 (High), G.729A (Low)
• The shorter the packet sending interval, the higher the speech quality.
• The higher the speech quality the V-SIPGW16 card provides, the more bandwidth the WAN requires.
Packet Sending Interval
Codec
296
10 ms
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
50 ms
60 ms
G.711
110.4 kbps
87.2 kbps
79.5 kbps
75.6 kbps
73.3 kbps
71.7 kbps
G.729A
54.4 kbps
31.2 kbps
23.5 kbps
19.6 kbps
17.3 kbps
15.7 kbps
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.4.5 Virtual SIP CO Line Card Specifications
8.4.5 Virtual SIP CO Line Card Specifications
For details about the RFCs and protocols for the V-SIPGW16 card, refer to the following specifications.
Items
SIP RFCs
Specification
RFC3261 (UDP only)
RFC3262 (PRACK)
RFC3264 (Offer/Answer)
RFC3311 (UPDATE)
RFC3581 (Symmetric Response Routing/rport)
RFC4028 (Session Timer)
Codecs
G.711 (a-law and µ-law)
G.729A
Voice Options
Echo Cancellation (48 ms)
Jitter Buffer (200 ms)
VAD (Voice Activity Detection)*1
PLC (Packet Loss Concealment)
DTMF Relay
Inband/Outband (RFC2833)/Outband (SIP INFO)
Fax Relay
G.711 Inband/T.38
Protocol/Function
RTP
RTCP
DNS (A/SRV)
NAT Traversal (STUN)
QoS (ToS field setting in IP header of RTP/RTCP)
*1
VAD is only available for codec G.711.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
297
8.5.1 H.323 QSIG Network
8.5 Types of PBX Networks
This section gives an overview of the types of networks the PBX can participate in.
8.5.1 H.323 QSIG Network
This section gives an overview of H.323 QSIG networks.
Image of an H.323 QSIG network:
H.323 QSIG
Network
Node 1:
Main Unit*1
Resources for Node 1
*1
Node 2:
KX-NCP500
Resources for Node 2
KX-NS700
Features
•
•
H.323 QSIG networks can include non-KX-NS series PBXs (e.g., KX-TDE200, KX-NCP500).
Resources are not available to extension users of other PBX without explicit configuration.
Conditions
•
PBXs in an H.323 QSIG network must be connected over a private IP network.
Bandwidth Requirements
Refer to "8.3.3 Bandwidth Assessment".
Required Items
•
V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
Note
•
•
•
298
The following activation key is required for enhanced QSIG network features (NDSS, Centralized Voice
Mail, etc.).
– KX-NSN002: Activation Key for QSIG Network (QSIG Network)
For more details about H.323 QSIG networks, refer to "15.1.13 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES" in
the Feature Manual.
For details about configuring and programming an H.323 QSIG network, refer to " TIE Line
Access" in the PC Programming Manual.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.6 Port Security
8.6 Port Security
If the VoIP network contains a firewall, the firewall must be configured appropriately to allow VoIP packets to
pass through certain ports of the ports listed below without being blocked by filtering. The ports for which you
need to configure the firewall may vary depending on the network conditions.
For more information, consult your network administrator.
The following table shows the PBX’s ports used for IP communications. Any access to the ports not in this list
is ignored.
Port Numbers for LAN Port
Port Number
Protocol
Application
Client/Server
Changeable/
Fixed
25
TCP/UDP
SMTP
Server
Changeable
53
UDP
DNS
Server
Fixed
67
UDP
DHCP
Server
Changeable
68
UDP
DHCP
Client
Changeable
80
TCP
HTTP
Server
Changeable
123
UDP
NTP
Server
Fixed
143
TCP
IMAP
Server
Changeable
161
UDP
SNMP
Server
Changeable
443
TCP
HTTPS
Server
Changeable
1717
UDP
Connectionless UDP
-
Changeable
1718
TCP
Connectionless TCP
-
Changeable
1719
UDP
H.225 RAS
-
Changeable
1720
TCP
H.225 Call Signal
-
Changeable
2103
TCP
CMM
Server
Fixed
2300
TCP
Telnet-SMDR
-
Changeable
2727
UDP
MGCP
-
Changeable
3493
TCP
UPS*2
-
Fixed
3702
UDP
WSD
Server
Changeable
4560–4561
UDP
PSAP
-
Changeable
4562
UDP
SSAP
-
Changeable
5060
UDP
SIP UA (EXT)
-
Changeable
7547
TCP
CWMP
Server
Changeable
7580
TCP
HTTP
Server
Changeable
9300
UDP
PTAP
-
Changeable
Document Version 2016-03
*1
Installation Manual
299
8.6 Port Security
Port Number
Protocol
Application
Changeable/
Fixed
Client/Server
10000–
10895
TCP
H.323 Dynamic Port
(H.225 Send, H.245 Send/
Receive, Connection-less
[TCP] Send Port)
-
Changeable
20000
TCP
UM-VMA*3
Server
Fixed
30021
TCP/UDP
FTP/FTPS
Server
Changeable
32727
UDP
MGCP*1 for IP-CS
-
Changeable
33090
UDP
ACS-MDW
Server
Fixed
33091
33092
TCP
33131
*1
*2
*3
300
33321
TCP
Access Point Login (Telnet)
Server
Changeable
33333
TCP
CTI 3rd Party Connection
-
Changeable
33334
TCP
CTI 1st Party Connection
-
Changeable
33478
UDP
STUN
Client
Changeable
33702
UDP
ACS-MDW (WSD)
Server
Fixed
35060
UDP
SIP UA (CO)
-
Changeable
37547
TCP
CWMP
Server
Changeable
37580
TCP
HTTPS
Server
Changeable
39300
UDP
PTAP for IP-CS
-
Changeable
40000–
40095
TCP/UDP
FTP/FTPS-Data
Server
Changeable
50000–
65535
(Ephemeral)
UDP
SNMP TRAP
Client
Fixed
TCP/UDP
FTP
Client
TCP/UDP
FTP/FTPS-Data
Client
UDP
NTP
Client
UDP
DNS
Client
UDP
SYSLOG
Client
TCP/UDP
SMTP
Client
TCP/UDP
POP3
Client
TCP/UDP
ACS-MDW
Server
Media Gateway Control Protocol. Used for call control command data and LCD/LED data transmission.
Used by UPS daemon.
Used by Unified Messaging.
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
8.6 Port Security
Port Numbers for Optional DSP Card
Port Number
Protocol
Application
Client/Server
Changeable/
Fixed
12000–
13535
UDP
RTP/RTCP
-
Changeable
16000–
18047
UDP
RTP/RTCP for NAT traversal
-
Changeable
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
301
8.6 Port Security
302
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Section 9
Appendix
This section provides information about System Prompt
Languages and the revision history.
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
303
9.1 System Prompt Languages
9.1 System Prompt Languages
Note
•
No. 1 is set by default. For details, see "24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System
Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting" in the PC Programming Manual.
System prompt languages stored in the System Memory
304
No. 1
(Primary)
US-English
No. 2
LA-Spanish
No. 3
-
No. 4
-
No. 5
-
No. 6
-
No. 7
-
No. 8
-
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
9.2.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx
9.2 Revision History
9.2.1 PFMPR Software File Version 004.1xxxx
New Contents
•
8.2 Information about Using a One-look Network
Changed Contents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Components
Introduction
2.1.1 System Configurations
2.3.3 System Capacity
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
5.8.4 Installing IP Phones at a Remote Site with a Built-in Media Relay Gateway
8.4.1 IP Telephony Service
9.2.2 PFMPR Software File Version 004.2xxxx
Changed Contents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Components
1.1 For Your Safety
2.2.1 Optional Equipment
2.3.1 General Description
2.3.3 System Capacity
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys
4.3.1.1 Mother Board in the Main Unit
4.4 Virtual Cards
4.6.1 EXP-M Card (KX-NS7130)
4.8.1 Maximum Cabling Distances of the Extension Wiring (Twisted Cable)
5.2 PC Connection
5.3 Starting Web Maintenance Console
5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard
5.4.5 Configuration of the Activation Keys
5.7.1 Assigning IP Addressing Information
5.8.1 Registering IP Telephones
5.8.2 De-registering IP Telephones
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice
7.1.5 Restarting the PBX
8.6 Port Security
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
305
9.2.4 PFMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx
9.2.3 PFMPR Software File Version 004.3xxxx
Changed Contents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Components
System Components—Equipment Compatibility for Main Unit
System Components—List of Abbreviations
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys—Unified Messaging System (Mailbox)
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys—Partner License
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys—Call Center Feature Enhancement
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys—Preinstalled Activation Keys in the Mother Board
4.3.2 SD Memory Cards
5.10 Programming E-mail Integration for UM Voice
9.2.4 PFMPR Software File Version 004.4xxxx
New Contents
•
3.1.1 Type and Maximum Number of Activation Keys—Packaged Activation Keys
Changed Contents
•
306
System Components
Installation Manual
Document Version 2016-03
Notes
Document Version 2016-03
Installation Manual
307
When you ship the product
Carefully pack and send it prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton. Attach a
postagepaid letter, detailing the symptom, to the outside of the carton. DO NOT send the product to the
Executive or Regional Sales offices. They are NOT equipped to make repairs.
Product Service
Panasonic Factory Service Centers for this product are listed in the service center directory. Consult your
certified Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.
For Future Reference
Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.
Note
The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record the
model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in
identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.
SERIAL NO.
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER'S ADDRESS
DEALER'S TEL. NO.
Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
http://www.panasonic.com/bts
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
System Networks Co., Ltd.
© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2014
PNQX6956VA DD1014AH4036
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising